P. 1
Tutorials Systems Mete Nu

Tutorials Systems Mete Nu

|Views: 299|Likes:
Published by downloadaboy

More info:

Published by: downloadaboy on May 03, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

05/04/2012

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Using the Tutorials
  • Accessing Training Files
  • Understanding the Basics
  • Navigating the User Interface
  • Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP
  • Planning Mechanical Systems
  • Creating Zones
  • Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones
  • Performing an Energy Analysis
  • Designing Air Systems
  • Placing Air Terminals
  • Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool
  • Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems
  • Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry
  • Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct
  • Resolving Routing Conflicts
  • Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method
  • Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct
  • Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
  • Inspecting Air Systems
  • Placing Air Conditioning Units
  • Completing the Supply Air Systems
  • Checking Air Systems
  • Designing Piping Systems
  • Creating Piping Views
  • Placing Radiators and a Boiler
  • Creating the Piping Systems
  • Creating Pipe Runs
  • Resolving Pipe Interference
  • Connecting the Boiler
  • Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
  • Placing Circulator Pumps
  • Inspecting Piping Systems
  • Checking Piping Systems
  • Planning Electrical Systems
  • Preparing the Electrical Plan
  • Defining Required Lighting Levels
  • Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels
  • Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels
  • Designing the Electrical System
  • Adding Lighting Fixtures
  • Placing Lighting Switches
  • Placing Power Receptacles
  • Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports
  • Placing Electrical Equipment
  • Creating Power Circuitry
  • Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires
  • Creating Switch Systems
  • Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs
  • Checking Your Design
  • Defining Circuit Loads
  • Planning Plumbing Systems
  • Preparing the Plumbing Plan
  • Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems
  • Designing Plumbing Systems
  • Add Plumbing Fixtures
  • Begin Creating the Sanitary System
  • Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System
  • Refining the Sanitary Stack
  • Refining the Urinal Lines
  • Adding Vents to the System
  • Create the Cold Water System
  • Create the cold water system
  • Create the Hot Water System
  • Create the hot water system
  • Designing Fire Protection Systems
  • Starting the Fire Protection Project
  • Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers
  • Connecting the Sprinklers
  • Creating the Fire Protection Dry System
  • Modifying Pipe Diameters
  • Creating Views
  • Duplicating Plan Views
  • Creating Elevation and Section Views
  • Creating Callout Views
  • Modifying View Tag Appearance
  • Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views
  • Creating a View Template
  • View Range and Plan Regions
  • Using Filters to Control Visibility
  • Masking Portions of a View
  • Working with Visual Overrides
  • Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project
  • Creating Drawing Sheets
  • Adding Views to Sheets
  • Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View
  • Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet
  • Tagging Objects
  • Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms
  • Tagging Doors and Windows
  • Tagging Other Objects
  • Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
  • Creating a Window Schedule
  • Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
  • Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
  • Creating a Room Schedule
  • Scheduling Rooms from a Program List
  • Creating a Room Color Diagram
  • Creating a Material Takeoff
  • Create a material takeoff
  • Scheduling Shared Parameters
  • Creating a Shared Parameter File
  • Adding Shared Parameters to a Family
  • Placing,Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters
  • Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes
  • Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions
  • Exporting Project Information with ODBC
  • Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access
  • Changing the Base Elevation of a Project
  • Relocating a Project
  • Dimensioning
  • Creating Dimensions
  • Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
  • Controlling Witness Lines
  • Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
  • Creating Text Annotation
  • Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
  • Creating a Detail from a Building Model
  • Detailing the View
  • Adding Detail Lines
  • Adding Text Notes
  • Creating Detail Components
  • Adding Keynotes
  • Creating Line-based Detail Components
  • Modifying a Keynote Database
  • Creating a Drafted Detail
  • Importing a Detail into a Drafting View
  • Creating a Reference Callout
  • Creating a Detail in a Drafting View
  • Using Note Blocks
  • Creating a Note Block
  • Using Drawing Lists
  • Creating a Drawing List
  • Using Legends
  • Creating a Symbol Legend
  • Creating a Component Legend
  • Using Revision Tracking
  • Setting Up a Revision Table
  • Sketching Revision Clouds
  • Tagging Revision Clouds
  • Working with Revisions
  • Importing from Other Applications
  • Importing Image Files
  • Importing Text Documents
  • Importing Spreadsheets
  • Using Dependent Views in Documentation
  • Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views
  • Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
  • Viewing a Building Model
  • Exploring the Building Model
  • Creating a Perspective View with a Camera
  • Creating a Section View
  • Creating Elevation Views
  • Controlling Fill Pattern Colors
  • Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material
  • Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type
  • Creating a View Plan Region
  • Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan
  • Rendering an Exterior View
  • Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
  • Adding Trees to the Site
  • Creating a Perspective View
  • Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View
  • Rendering an Interior View
  • Adding RPC People
  • Creating the Interior Perspective View
  • Creating a New Render Scene
  • Defining Daylights and Rendering the View
  • Creating and Recording Walkthroughs
  • Creating a Walkthrough
  • Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position
  • Recording the Walkthrough
  • Creating Views for Solar Studies
  • Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View
  • Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View
  • Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View
  • Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations
  • Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice
  • Previewing Solar Study Animation
  • Exporting Solar Studies
  • Exporting the Study as AVI
  • Exporting a Study as PNG
  • Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study
  • Creating an Internal Plan Study
  • Orienting to True North for Solar Studies
  • Orienting to True North
  • Rendering Interior Shadow Views
  • Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique
  • Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique
  • Using Advanced Model Graphics
  • Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet
  • Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique
  • Preparing the Elevation Analytique
  • Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet
  • Adding Section Views to the Analytique
  • Preparing a Section View for the Analytique
  • Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View
  • Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique
  • Working with a Presentation View Template
  • Working in a Callout Analytique
  • Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes
  • Creating Cutaway Isometric Views
  • Creating Cutaway Perspective Views
  • Annotating the Analytique
  • Using Families and the Family Editor
  • Introduction to Families
  • Creating a Door Family
  • Drawing the Door Plan View Components
  • Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry
  • Assigning Materials to the Door Components
  • Defining New Door Types
  • Creating a Window Family
  • Specifying the New Window Parameters
  • Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry
  • Assigning Materials to the Window Components
  • Defining New Window Types
  • Creating a Furniture Family
  • Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters
  • Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
  • Defining New Furniture Types
  • Creating a Baluster Family
  • Drawing a Baluster
  • Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
  • Creating Profile Families
  • Drawing a Sweep Profile
  • Drawing a Rail Profile
  • Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
  • Drawing a Reveal Profile
  • Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
  • Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
  • Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
  • Creating a Room Tag
  • Specifying Room Tag Parameters
  • Creating an Annotation Symbol
  • Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol
  • Adding the New North Arrow to a Project
  • Creating a Titleblock Family
  • Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet
  • Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock
  • Adding the Titleblock to a New Project
  • Creating In-Place Families
  • Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family
  • Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family
  • Planning a Parametric Component Family
  • Determining Component Needs
  • Selecting the Family Template
  • Creating the Component Skeleton
  • Adding Reference Planes
  • Adding Dimensions and Constraints
  • Creating New Length Parameters
  • Flexing the Component Model
  • Adding Solid Geometry
  • Creating Solid Extrusions
  • Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
  • Creating Additional Solid Geometry
  • Testing the Family in a Project
  • Loading a Family into a Project
  • Testing a Family Instance in a Project
  • Working with Nested Subcomponents
  • Adding a Nested Component
  • Creating Formula-controlled Parameters
  • Arraying Nested Subcomponents
  • Reloading a Family into a Project
  • Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
  • Creating and Applying Subcategories
  • Creating Material Parameters
  • Controlling Component Visibility
  • Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
  • Creating Component Types
  • Creating Multiple Component Types
  • Creating Conditional Formulas
  • Creating Roofs
  • Creating an Extruded Roof
  • Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint
  • Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint
  • Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint
  • Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint
  • Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof
  • Aligning Roof Eaves
  • Creating a Mansard Roof
  • Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits
  • Creating Roof Fascia
  • Creating Gutters
  • Creating Soffits
  • Modifying System Settings
  • Modifying General System Options
  • Specifying File Locations
  • Specifying Spelling Options
  • Modifying Snap Settings
  • Modifying Project Settings
  • Creating and Applying Materials
  • Creating and Applying Fill Patterns
  • Controlling Object Styles
  • Modifying Line Patterns and Styles
  • Modifying Annotations
  • Specifying Units of Measurement,Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options
  • Modifying Project Browser Organization
  • Creating an Office Template
  • Choosing the Base Template
  • Loading and Modifying Families and Groups
  • Modifying Views and View Templates
  • Modifying Render Scene Settings
  • Modifying Import/Export Settings
  • Setting up Shared and Project Parameters
  • Creating Named Print Settings
  • Create named print settings

Revit MEP

Metric Tutorial

25703-050000-5080A

2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. IES <Virtual Environment>, IES <VE> Copyright© 2007 by Integrated Environmental Solutions Limited Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Performing an Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Resolving Routing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 . 214 . 219 . 223 . 225 . 228

Contents | v

Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 228 . 234 . 239 . 244 . 245 . 250 . 255 . 260 . 264 . 270 . 275 . 282 . 282 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 289 . 296 . 306 . 312 . 317 . 323 . 330 . 336 . 336 . 340 . 364 . 403 . 409

Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Part 2

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 . 422 . 425 . 431 . 436 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 446 . 447 . 450 . 456 . 456 . 459 . 463 . 465 . 470 . 470 . 475 . 479 . 482 . 482

Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

vi | Contents

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 487 . 489 . 491 . 493 . 499 . 502 . 505 . 505 . 506 . 509 . 514 . 514 . 516 . 516 . 520 . 521 . 525 . 525 . 531 . 533 . 537 . 540 . 541 . 548 . 548 . 554 . 558 . 560 . 562 . 564 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 570 . 572 . 588 . 588 . 593 . 593 . 594 . 594 . 597 . 602 . 602 . 604 . 606 . 607 . 609 . 609 . 610 . 611

Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Contents | vii

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Part 3

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 . 634 . 637 . 643 . 645 . 647 . 647 . 649 . 650 . 651 . 656 . 656 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 668 . 668 . 670 . 674 . 675 . 677 . 677 . 680 . 682 . 686 . 686 . 687 . 689 . 692 . 692 . 693 . 694 . 694 . 697 . 698 . 698 . 700 . 701 . 704 . 704 . 709 . 709 . 711 . 713 . 716 . 716 . 718 . 721 . 721 . 725

Chapter 12 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Chapter 15 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 727 . 730 . 732 . 739 . 739 . 746 . 750

Part 4

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 . 760 . 765 . 768 . 770 . 773 . 774 . 775 . 782 . 784 . 789 . 801 . 804 . 808 . 808 . 815 . 818 . 827 . 833 . 836 . 838 . 838 . 840 . 842 . 842 . 842 . 843 . 844 . 845 . 846 . 848 . 850 . 850 . 852 . 852 . 854 . 855 . 855 . 858 . 866 . 868 . 868 . 874

Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 880 . 881 . 884 . 884 . 890 . 894 . 897 . 900 . 900 . 902 . 905 . 914 . 914 . 915 . 919 . 919 . 923 . 928 . 933 . 935 . 935 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 945 . 945 . 946

Part 5

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 . 952 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 966 . 967 . 969 . 970 . 971 . 972

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Part 6

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

x | Contents

Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 1003 . 1003 . 1004 . 1008 . 1011 . 1013 . 1015 . 1016 . 1018

Contents | xi

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you use the default template and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select Systems-Default_Metric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit MEP is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2008?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
■ ■

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■

Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some

Understanding the Basics | 7

or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit MEP 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

This creates a new project based on the default template.In the following illustration. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. In addition. By default. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . the user interface is labeled. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. click . you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. In the steps that follow. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. place the cursor over the menu name. TIP For example. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and View. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. On the left side of the Options Bar. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Then. To choose commands. click the command name to start the command. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. notice a door type is specified. While working in the drawing area. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. and click. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. click Toolbar. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Edit.

You use the Type Selector in two ways. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. First. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. Within the drawing area. For example. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. notice the list of walls that are available. if you intend to add a door. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. If you select the Door tool. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. 11 Click OK.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components. Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images. immediately below the Type Selector. View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements. ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

elevations. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands. 3D). select Views (all). family category (doors. families. reports. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information. families. To access the commands within a tab. walls. and group name. and rename views. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. In the Project Browser.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. click the tab. windows). schedules. Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. and groups. Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. sheets. delete.

so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Do not click. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. double-click the name. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. click Wall. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. After you create a browser organization scheme. The Status Bar 16 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Cancel. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. The browser is dockable. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector.■ ■ To open a view. ■ 13 In the Type Selector.

19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. Navigating the User Interface | 15 ." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. When you place the cursor over a component. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. In the Status Bar. Revit MEP 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2008 Help. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. The Status Bar also provides information. 20 Press TAB. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 18 On the Design Bar. in conjunction with Tooltips. regarding selected components within a view. It highlights when the cursor is over it. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. In this case. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. click Modify. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol.In the bottom left corner of the window. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5.

Toolbar: From the Toolbar. find a keyword on the Index tab. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. Windows: From any window. Click the Help button. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab.rvt. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. You can also press SHIFT+F1. For example. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. You can use this tri-pane. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. There are several tools that help you find information. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. If there is no Help button displayed. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP In this exercise. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. click . click Training Files.

Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 17 . 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 6 On the View toolbar.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 8 Click in the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom.

use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. click Zoom. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 14 Enter ZR. referred to as shape handles. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . roll the wheel to zoom the view. on the View toolbar. and double-click 2nd Flr. expand Views (all). as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. called drag controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. press and hold CTRL. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. bottoms. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. On a wheel mouse. and select the wall. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. To modify or add snap increments. These are the drag controls. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Similar controls. and drag the cursor. Without clicking in the dialog. click . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. When drawing or modifying a building model. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. Small blue dots. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. display along the ends.

Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 19 . and on the Edit toolbar. click (Move). After selecting the element to be moved. and click again to specify the ending position.15 Click and drag the left control. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. to lengthen the wall. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. require two clicks to complete the command. In this case. you want to move the table closer to the wall. such as Move and Copy. for example. Some commands. click to specify the starting position. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.

Select the plant.20 Click next to the lower wall. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 23 On the Undo menu. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. as shown. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. In this example. Move. click the drop-down menu next to . 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. select the second item in the list. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar.

Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. on the Standard toolbar. Press ESC twice. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 21 . Some commands. 26 To end the command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click Modify. On the Design Bar. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Undo command. such as the Lines command. click Lines. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

you will understand the process. By following the recommended workflow. go to http://www. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2008. methodology. and concludes with documenting your design and exporting your design. you design a mechanical system for an office building. 23 . and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. However.autodesk. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. If the tutorial datasets are not present.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Mechanical Systems 2 In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This workflow begins with systems planning and design. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. As you create the mechanical system. This system consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system.

and name the new parameter group Rooms. right-click the view named 2 . and click Save.Planning Mechanical Systems Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. however. right-click Copy of 2 . navigate to the folder of your choice. planning is critical to a successful design. 10 Under Parameters. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Rooms. you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC floor plan. and click Select. Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Copy room tags 12 In the Project Browser. click Create. Later in the design process. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones. After you create these views. click the Training Files icon. The shared parameter file is saved as a text file. Next. select Shared parameter for Parameter Type. Zones allow you to better analyze and control the heating and cooling of the space. enter Office for File name. you create a shared project parameter. and click OK twice. 5 After the Project Parameters dialog opens. 3 Enter 2 . and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog.Mech. you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space to determine heating and cooling requirements. In this lesson. 24 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK 3 times. click Yes. you refer back to the views to verify zone information. click New. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. and click Rename. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. First. 8 In the Save As dialog.Mech. you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors. When prompted to choose a shared parameter file. A new view called Copy of 2 . Create a shared project parameter 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. you create separate views in which to work with zones.Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface). drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. under Categories. Creating Zones In this exercise. click Add. under Groups. click New. and click OK. Create a new floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Open the m Zones. and then you use this parameter to assign each zone to a room.Mech Zones for Name. 13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner.

In this case.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. 17 In the Project Browser. click Check None. Creating Zones | 25 . 15 In the Filter box. All level 2 room tags are selected. 16 Press CTRL+C to copy the selection. you would have needed to manually align the selection. TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range are selected. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click 2 . and then select Room Tags. and click OK. If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V). 18 Click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. under Mechanical. all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original placement. click to filter the selected elements.Mech Zones to make it the active view. All level 2 room tags are pasted into the view. only mechanical elements are selected because the view discipline has been specified as Mechanical.

under Other. and click (Properties). select the first room component. To clear a selection. and click OK. TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room.Mech Zones view. press SHIFT and select the room component to clear. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation). Level 2 Room Name Office 6 Office 7 Office 8 Office 33 Office 32 Conference Room 31 Office 29 Office 28. enter zone 1 for Zone. press Ctrl.Assign zones to the level 2 rooms 19 In the 2 . use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. Room Component Room Tag 20 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in the room. You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6. select the Office 6 room component. and select each additional room component. 21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below. Office 27 Office 26 Lounge 25 Open 2 Ladies’ Room 23 Men’s Room 22 Zone zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6 zone 7 zone 8 zone 9 zone 10 zone 11 zone 12 zone 13 26 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Then.

you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views. In this exercise. assign zones to the rooms according to the following table: Level 1 Room Name Office 3 Office 4.Mech Zones view. navigate to the folder of your choice. 23 In the 1 . Open the m Zones Color Scheme. Office 5 Office 18 Office 17. enter Zones Training for File name. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 27 .Assign zones to level 1 rooms 22 Using the methods that you just learned. You then copied room tags into the new views. NOTE After finishing each exercise.Mech and name it 1 . you can choose to save your work. and created a shared project parameter. Office 13 Office 12 Office 11 Office 10.Mech Zones view. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. Using this project parameter. you define a color scheme and assign it to the zones that you created in the previous exercise.Mech Zones. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned) into the 1 . you assigned zones to the level 1 and level 2 rooms. and click Save.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 25 In the Save As dialog. However. Office 9 Open 1 Ladies’ Room 20 Men’s Room 19 Zone zone 14 zone 15 zone 16 zone 17 zone 18 zone 19 zone 20 zone 21 zone 22 zone 23 zone 24 24 If you want to save your work. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using room schedules or accessing element properties. do the following: ■ ■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 . click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. Office 16 Office 14.

8 Click OK twice. 11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. click (Properties). do the following: ■ For Color.Mech Zones to make it the active view. Next. and on the Options Bar. click Color Scheme Legend. under Scheme Definition. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate to create a new color scheme legend type based on the existing one. and click OK. and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when changing a parameter. notice that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is now the current color scheme legend type. Modify the color scheme 12 Select the color scheme legend. click the Edit/New button. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. In the Type Selector. 7 For Name.Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. ■ Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined. TIP You can also right-click. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. and double-click 2 . Apply the color scheme 9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. and click Zoom to Fit. enter HVAC. You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number. select Number for Color Scheme. you modify the color scheme so that it is based on zones. Verify that By value is selected. and click to place the legend. and click OK. 28 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 14 Click OK. 13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Drafting. select Zone.

15 In the Project Browser. 17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 .Mech Zones to make it the active view. This is because color schemes are view specific. select Number for Color Scheme.Mech Zones view. and click OK. Notice that the HVAC color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector. click the color scheme legend. 21 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 19 In the drawing area. under Basic Colors. click Color Scheme Legend. The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned. double-click 1 . 22 In the Color dialog. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. and click the associated color. you create and modify the color scheme for level 1. so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. 20 On the Options Bar.The modified color scheme displays. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because you specified a color scheme based on zones. and click OK twice. each room displays the color that is associated with its zone. select color RGB 255-255-128 (a light yellow color). Next. and verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected in the Type Selector. 18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 29 . NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be changed for visual clarity. The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied. scroll down to Value 22 (zone 22). Also note that elevations have been hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility.

NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. if you receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be approximate. click the Training Files icon. 24 In the Save As dialog. you perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage. and click Save. In this exercise. and click Mechanical. enter Zones Color Scheme Training for File name. NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. Open the m Energy Analysis.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 30 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. verify that Office is selected. In the next exercise. right-click the Design Bar. 2 On the Calculations tab of the Room and Area Settings dialog. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone that you previously assigned each room. During an energy analysis. click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Performing an Energy Analysis In this exercise. verify that Compute room volumes is selected. Specify room and area settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Room and Area Settings. and do the following: ■ For Building Type. click Heating and Cooling Loads. Verify building information 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Zone 22 (Open 1) displays the new color. you perform an energy analysis on the building to evaluate energy loads. click Compute room volumes. navigate to the folder of your choice. 23 If you want to save your work.

verify that <Building> is selected. Rooms are then listed for the selected level. In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog. under Energy Analysis.You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building. 6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level. You have verified the building information. spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the building. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 7 Select Level 1 for Level. Then. ■ ■ (Browser Building For Building Service (Default Room Service). notice that the rooms in the building display. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). verify that VAV . you need to view specific rooms. Performing an Energy Analysis | 31 . you view various rooms in the building.■ For Building Construction. 9 Click (Highlight). View rooms 5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. MA is selected. 8 Select 16 Office. Next.Single Duct is selected. verify that Boston. click Edit for Energy Data. For Place and Location. click the Rooms tab. Next.

You can also view a room in relation to the other rooms or architecture in the entire building. 10 With the Highlight tool active. you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane. 32 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 14 Click (Isolate). select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them. and zoom) the view in the preview pane as you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse. or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them. 11 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. click (Shading) to shade the room in blue. If you select Shading. Highlighting rooms allows you to verify that the room boundaries are as you defined them. pan. and then select 25 Lounge.The Office 16 highlights in red. Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin. Next. Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model. you isolate a room. 13 Select Level 2 for Level. NOTE Using the View Selector. the rooms display in blue. You can also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level. 12 On the View Selector.

verify the room information for the other rooms in the building. room construction. The room information is located under Energy Analysis. Next. You can also access the room information by selecting a room in the drawing area. select Office 3 on Level 1. 16 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Performing an Energy Analysis | 33 . right-clicking.The Lounge on level 2 displays while all other rooms are hidden. or room service values. Isolating a room allows you to easily verify rooms that normally would be obstructed by other rooms and difficult to view normally. and Room Service. 19 Using the methods that you learned. This indicates that the information in the building type named <Building> will be used for the Office 3 energy analysis. Perform an energy analysis and view the report 20 Click Calculate. you can perform an energy analysis. Verify room information 17 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 15 With the Isolate tool active. you verify room information. Now that the building and room information has been verified. After the energy analysis is completed. and the Loads Report Summary displays. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and clicking Element Properties. or import the IES model that has already been created. these values on the Room tab will be blank. Make your room information selections based on your specifications. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). Room Construction. TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them. 18 Verify that <Building> is selected for Room Type.

under Graphics. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and validate your air system design. including the Project Information. In this lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. and Room Summary. modify air terminal parameters.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. 23 In the Save As dialog. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. 34 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You then performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. In this exercise. and viewed room to verify room boundaries. You can also select the 1 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters. adding AC units. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. Weather Data. Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. and click View Properties. you create new views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 22 If you want to save your work. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. Create and modify a new ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. As you place the air terminals. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Air Terminals. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties). After system creation. you specified building and room information. Then. After completing the air systems lesson. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next lesson. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. sizing ductwork. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Select Level 1 for Underlay. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. and double-click 1 . Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. you will create supply air systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.21 Review the Loads Report Summary.

6 Click OK twice. select M_Rectangular Diffuser .Ceiling Mech is the active view. You can also press Esc to accomplish this. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. enter the value. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. click Modify.Round Connection : M_600x600 . and press Tab. click Air Terminal. for the Level parameter. ■ ■ Under Primary Range. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. for the Cut plane parameter. and enter 2615 for Offset. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE When entering a value. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. TIP When you click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. and enter 2615 mm for Offset. enter 0 for Offset. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . 10 Move your cursor to the upper left corner of the view. Placing Air Terminals | 35 . Under View Depth. You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 12 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red.200 Neck. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. For example. and click to place the supply air terminal as shown.5 In the View Range dialog. 11 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. for the Top parameter. the command in progress terminates.

click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. This places the air terminal with an 2600mm offset from level 1. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. Thus. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and after the mid point snap displays. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. and click OK. This is also the ceiling height for all rooms. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. 36 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . enter 150 L/s for Flow. TIP To use the Move tool.13 On the Options Bar. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point as shown. under Constraints. 17 In the drawing area. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. and then click . the air terminal will be placed in the ceiling. move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan. click to specify the move start point. enter 2600 for Offset.

Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected. then select Multiple. 19 On the Options Bar. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). and then click the center mid point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Placing Air Terminals | 37 . 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point.The air terminal is placed. Notice that the air terminal start point and end point align. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar.

listening dimensions display to aid placement. 38 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. 22 In the Type Selector. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. click Air Terminal. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point.

and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them. 25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm).Before you move the exhaust grill. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 120 L/s and the offset to 2600mm. select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. Placing Air Terminals | 39 . place 3 return air terminals in the open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms. 24 In the Type Selector.

and click Element Properties. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click on the Edit toolbar.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 40 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click. and click OK. Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout 30 Select the Office 3 air terminal. under Mechanical. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. clear the UpFlowArrow check box. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. click Modify.

■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. navigate to the folder of your choice. do the following for level 2: ■ ■ Make 2 . Create the level 2 air terminal layout 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. In the Element Properties dialog. Placing Air Terminals | 41 .Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. click File menu ➤ Save.Ceiling Mech the active view. Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers. Specify the same 2600mm offset parameter for all air terminals as you did for level 1. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. and click Save.After you place the supply air terminals. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. 33 If you want to save your work. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. and 120 L/s airflow for the exhaust diffusers. specify the same view parameters as 1 . Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. You will be using different views to design the systems. 34 In the Save As dialog.

In this exercise. ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and learned a method for precise placement.In this exercise. In the next exercise. Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. modified the air terminal parameters. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. click Schedule/Quantities. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. Open the m Air System Schedules. select Room. under Available fields. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. In the next exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. 7 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Number Room: Name Flow Room: Actual Supply Airflow 42 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 4 Under Select available fields from.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 5 While pressing Ctrl. you create the air systems. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. click the Training Files icon. and select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow Room: Calculated Supply Airflow Room: Name Room: Number 6 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. More importantly. select Air Terminals. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. select Flow. do the following: ■ Under Category. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog.

Click OK. 10 Click OK. and Totals only. Select Blank line. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Select HVAC for Discipline. Enter Room: Actual Supply Airflow . The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. select the field and click Remove. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Check Supply Airflow for Name. Verify that Ascending is selected. Enter -35 L/s and 35 L/s for Value. 9 In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ ■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog. Select Between for Test. Click OK twice. select Check Supply Airflow. These rooms have a difference between the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s. in the Fields list. and click Conditional Format. Format the calculated value parameter 11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 43 . NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim including spaces. Select Footer.Room: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. and Itemize every instance is selected. Organize the data 13 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Room: Number for Sort by. Create a calculated value parameter 8 Click Calculated Value. Select Air Flow for Type. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Check Supply Airflow is selected for Field. Verify that Formula is selected.■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field.

A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser.Mech to make it the active view. 21 Close the schedule view. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. All other Check Supply Airflow values that do not meet these requirements are not green and need modification. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 16 Enter ZR. This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. the selected air terminal displays in red. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. NOTE If a different project is also open. NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. The green values in the Check Supply Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room meets the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 L/s. 18 In the schedule. 17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. Use the schedule as a design tool 14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green. double-click 1 . Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. 44 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are met. The Check Supply Airflow value displays in green indicating that it now complies with the Office 4 airflow design requirements. and maximize the 1 . NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. After you modify the airflow parameters. 15 In the Project Browser.Mech floor plan view. select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal. Next. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. 19 Delete 150 L/s enter 165. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. and press Tab. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. you are changing the air terminal connector size. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog.

you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. 23 In the Save As dialog. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. 7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. then press F9. However. Under Primary Range. During this exercise. and click View Properties. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . Unlike logical connections. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and then create the logical connection between the system components. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. 5 Click OK twice. click the Training Files icon. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation.Mech view. click Edit for View Range. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. click System Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 45 . A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. under Extents. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. 4 In the View Range dialog. In the next exercise.22 If you want to save your work. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. This is the power of BIM. After creating the logical connection. enter an Offset value of 3000.Mech to make it the active view. Explore the System Browser 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click in the drawing area to make it active. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. If the System Browser does not respond. click File menu ➤ Save. you create air systems. Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. and click Save. and double-click 1 . This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. for the Top parameter.

you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 8 With the view active. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and press Esc twice. For now. TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. If desired. after you placed the diffusers. So.200mm Inlet. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. As you assign diffusers to systems.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. Thus. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. air terminals. click to place the VAV box. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. click Mechanical Equipment. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. enter ZR. if all system components are assigned. 46 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. 11 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 3 door. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment.

The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). Next. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. and cleared from the Options Bar. enter 2900 for Offset.Modify VAV box parameters 12 Right-click the VAV box. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. and select the VAV box. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. click (Select Equipment for System). 16 On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 14 Select the Office 3 rectangular diffuser. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 47 . enter 165 L/s for AirFlow. Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. click (Create Supply Air System). you add the VAV to this system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal.Airflow. Under Mechanical . Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. You created a system that includes the air terminal. select an air terminal that you added to the system.

do the following: 19 ■ Verify that Network is select for Solution Type. 21 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. and select solution 2. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. 48 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select Main. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. place the cursor over the Office 3 air terminal and press Tab. 18 On the Options Bar. ■ Click (Next Solution). Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. This display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that Solutions is selected. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. They remain assign to their respective default systems. The organization is from upstream.The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. 20 On the Options Bar. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. and click Select to select the system. and select the system. The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. Create the ductwork 17 With the new system selected. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). click Settings. click Layout Path on the Options Bar.

The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. select Medium for Detail Level. For example.22 Under System Type: Supply Air. 24 Under System Type: Supply Air. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. Enter 2900 for Offset. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. 26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. 23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Enter 2900mm for Offset. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. For more information. as was the elbow itself. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 49 . NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Change the geometry display 27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. refer to Help.Round for Flex Duct Type. select Branch. click Finish Layout. For example. thus it is not part of the system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. 25 Click OK. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection.

the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Size the duct 29 Place the cursor over the duct. then you know that a disconnection exists. and equipment. fittings.65 Pa/m. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. and enter . you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you press Tab. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. click Sizing.TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. and click to select them. 30 On the Options Bar. select Coarse detail level for single line. Verify that Only is selected. Rerouting usually correct this issue. 31 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. ■ 50 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Under Constraints. If the entire network does not highlight. under Sizing Method. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Click OK. and press Tab twice. On the View Control Bar. Check duct connectivity 28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.

press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. double-click the second VAV box listed.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. 36 In the left column of the System Browser. 35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. 33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . click to place the VAV box. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.The Office 3 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . enter ZR. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 51 . and click Element Properties. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 32 Click in the drawing area. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices immediately below Office 3). click Mechanical Equipment. IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 34 In the Type Selector.200mm Inlet. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser.

41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. and click Select from the context menu. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. right-click the component in the left column. click Add To System. 42 Place the cursor over the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. enter 2900mm for Offset. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals. The component highlights in the drawing area. and click OK. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. If not. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar.TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. 40 Click (Edit System). under Constraints. and number of elements in the active being edited. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. 38 Select the Office 4 rectangular diffuser. NOTE After you select a system component. a new system is immediately created. right-click. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. system equipment. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. This system includes the selected system component(s). and enter 350 L/s for AirFlow. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. 52 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

47 Select the VAV box. the number of elements has increased to 2. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. 44 Select the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. 49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. On the Options Bar. click Finish System. 45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. 46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4. click Select Equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 53 . the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. On the Options Bar. 48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar.43 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active.

verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 54 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 53 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. 50 Click to select the system. click Layout Path. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 51 On the Options Bar. The system displays in red. and select solution 3.If you leave the mouse stationary. 52 On the Options Bar.

You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 55 . These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Finish Layout. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. This was the reason for the warning message. 54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard.IMPORTANT When creating layouts. 59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. ■ 56 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Duct Fitting. under Sizing Method. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. Click OK. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Verify that Only is selected. Under Constraints. 57 In the Type Selector. You can either relocate the VAV box. 58 Move the cursor over the end of the main. So. If a warning occurs. 56 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. click Sizing.65 Pa/m. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. 62 In the Duct Sizing dialog. click to place the endcap. 61 On the Options Bar. you can review it and take action if necessary. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. and click to select them. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Add an endcap 55 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 4. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Size the duct 60 Place the cursor over the duct. and after the end point snap displays. and enter . or modify the duct manually. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system.

It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Next. Check duct connectivity 63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The VAV box. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. air terminals. However.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 57 .The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 4 and 5 is sized using the Friction method at . and press Tab twice.

click Zoom in Region from the context menu.200mm Inlet. 70 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 58 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 68 In the Type Selector.Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 64 Right-click in the drawing area. 66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below.Mech view. and click to place the VAV box. 69 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). 67 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 65 In the 1 . click Mechanical Equipment. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 .

The selected diffusers highlight in red. click . and click OK. 76 Select the VAV to add it to the system. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. You can refer to the Air Terminal Schedule or select each air terminal to verify this information. click . This is the total amount of airflow for the 5 air terminals that will be connected. select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV. under Constraints. and enter 825 for AirFlow. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 75 On the Options Bar. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. The new supply air system displays in red. click to select the system. click . You will add this later. Then.71 Select the VAV. 73 While pressing CTRL. and on the Options Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 59 . enter 2900 for Offset. and press TAB once to highlight the system. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. 74 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. and the red system display cleared.

select the left section of the main. and select solution 3. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Next.The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. 80 In the drawing area. click Modify. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 78 On the Options Bar. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 77 With the system selected. You have logically connected the air system components. ■ Click . click Layout Path on the Options Bar. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. 79 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 60 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . It does not indicate a ductwork layout path.

select each of the 2 branches and drag them to their new locations as shown. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. Next. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 61 . notice that drag controls display. 83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. you need to modify the branch layout.After you select the main. 82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV. 81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV.

A change has occurred in the air system design. click Add to System. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 85 Select the main duct. and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout. NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings. 86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. and click on the Options Bar.84 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. 87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. The system components are now physically connected. the branch path is too close to the diffuser. click Finish Layout. mechanical equipment. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. 62 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Undo the layout. The ductwork is created. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created.

select a system component that is already part of a system. click Finish System.Notice that on the Options Bar. and working from the end of the main. The new system component is now part of the same system. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. and click Delete on the context menu. the Number of Elements increased to 6. VAV. 88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. and the other duct segment. This verifies the added diffuser. select the transition. 91 While pressing CTRL. 92 Right-click. duct segment. elbow. Next. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. 89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. 90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. Then. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 63 .

then you are dragging the lower connector.The rectangular to round duct transition fitting is too close to the main. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and provide sufficient space to create the duct. 64 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . continue using the Layout Path tool. and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the duct. and locate the top connector. You need to widen the distance between the 2 elements. 96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only. you can right-click the connector. 95 Zoom out the view. otherwise an error will occur when you attempt to size the duct. Undo and drag the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct. At this point. 97 On the Options Bar. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. You will draw duct in the next exercise. However. 93 Zoom the view. select the transition fitting.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 65 . Ignore the warning message. Add an endcap 99 Zoom in on the open end of the main duct. click Duct Fitting. click to place the endcap. click Finish Layout.■ Click . 100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 101 In the Type Selector. the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. 102 Move the cursor over the end of the main. The new ductwork is created. Due to the takeoff based duct type. and select solution 1 98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. and after the end point snap displays. This caused the warning message to display.

change the airflow to 990 L/s.Airflow. You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system. Check duct connectivity 104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. and click to select them. and click Element Properties from the context menu. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout.Notice that the centerline snap also displays to aid in fitting placement. 66 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. and press Tab twice. 107 Place the cursor over the main duct. 106 Under Mechanical . and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. Size the duct 105 Right-click the VAV box. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. For VAV airflow. 108 On the Options Bar. click Sizing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Verify that Only is selected. Under Constraints. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Reposition and rotate if necessary.The selection displays in red. double-click 1 . Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned.65 Pa/m. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. 109 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems 110 In the Project Browser. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. ■ This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. specify the air terminal airflow. Next.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. under Sizing Method.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. and enter . ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 67 . you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. under Mechanical. Click OK.

If you receive errors. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at . 113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. see the note below.65 Pa/m and select Only. modify the layout. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. Verify that all Other options are cleared. or reinsert duct fittings. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . Next. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium. modify the duct manually. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 112 Use the 2 . Do not change the duct conversion settings. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. 68 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. You can either relocate the VAV box. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2.■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. see the note below.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. If you receive errors. So. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings.Mech mechanical floor plan view. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified.

65 Pa/m and select Only. Verify that all Other options are cleared. You also specified VAV airflow. see the note above. click File menu ➤ Save. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 69 . and validated the systems in the System Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. If you receive errors.■ For VAV airflow. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. 115 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. 114 If you want to save your work. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. Size the duct using the Friction method at . Do not change the duct conversion settings. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. sized the ductwork. In the next exercise. If you receive errors. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. see the note above. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. Although you already checked duct connectivity. specify the air terminal airflow. checked duct connectivity. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. In this exercise. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. After creating each system. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. and click Save.

and click Zoom to Fit. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. and double-click 1 . Adding a section view is a 2-click process. 70 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Section. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. enter ZR. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3.Mech to make it the active view. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Graphics.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. The first click specifies the section head. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. The section relocates under HVAC. and 5. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Training Files icon. 4. Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation. and the second click specifies the section tail. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. and click Properties. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you add the section. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area.

10 On the Design Bar. You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. click Modify. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5.8 In the drawing area. select Medium for Detail Level. click the section. 12 On the View Control Bar. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. The section head displays in blue. The selected section displays in red. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 71 . The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. similar to the level heads in the elevation view.

Notice that in the 3D Mech view. 18 On the View Control Bar. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. 17 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 72 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and double-click 3D Mech to make it the active view.14 Continue validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. A section box displays around the building model. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. and click View Properties. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. and click OK. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. under Extents. select Section Box. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create.

and click Save. and 5 duct geometry is as you expected. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 73 . 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. 27 If you want to save your work. 26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next exercise. click (Dynamically Modify View). you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. use the Zoom.22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. click File menu ➤ Save. 4. and Spin buttons to verify that the Office 3. Scroll. 28 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. 24 On the View toolbar. 25 In the Dynamic View dialog.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 74 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click to specify the start point. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. do the following. click Duct. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. select Round Duct : Taps. Enter 2900 for Offset. 4 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. Verify that Angle is cleared. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 5 On the Options Bar.Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 1 . You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that 300 is selected for diameter (D:). 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZR. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left partition of the Ladies’ Room above. Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct.Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 75 . 8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment. and click to specify the end point. enter 2750 to specify a 2750mm length for the first duct segment. move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right. 10 Now. and after the listening dimensions appear. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. 9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm.7 Move the cursor to the left and when the listening dimensions appear. enter 11000.

place the cursor over the duct. press Tab. move the cursor to the right. Notice that the Draw tool remains active. you connect VAV boxes to the primary. 11 Finally. If you happened to press Esc twice and closed the Draw tool. 14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection. and after the listening dimensions appear. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3. Then. click Duct on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar to open it again. use the Move tool to move the horizontal duct segment (located over the Mechanical/Electrical) up until the duct clears the exterior wall.NOTE The primary duct needs to clear the exterior wall located on the left. Depending on the location of the first duct start point. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. and select the duct (duct displays in red). Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 13 Enter ZR. it may not clear the wall. click to specify the start point. 12 Press Esc once to stop drawing the current duct. Next. enter 3000. 76 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . after the connector snap displays. If the duct does not clear the wall.

17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment. If you pause briefly. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. 15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. TIP When drawing duct. When drawing duct. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter. and click to specify the end point. and press Enter to specify the end point. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. 16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 77 . Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type.

the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4.18 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. 19 With the Draw tool open. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. 78 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. After you click to specify the end point.

you only need to press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. 21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. you should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu. 26 In the Type Selector. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. On the View Control Bar. the duct diameter. or width and height. 25 Right-click. click to specify the start point. Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. 22 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. Because the duct is complete after you connected it to the primary. 23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 79 . 27 Draw a duct segment that connects to the centerline of the primary. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection. 24 Select the Office 18 VAV. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. and after the connector snap displays. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. However.

31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. 29 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 30 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. 80 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Check connectivity 32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes.28 Press Esc. zoom the view to the right of the primary.

IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. specify a 2900mm offset. On the Options Bar. 33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. Check connectivity. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. Finally. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Do not size the primary. This is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. Complete the level 1 primary duct 34 In the Project Browser. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 81 . and Angle is cleared. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. you will do that in a later exercise. 35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. You will size the primary in a later exercise.

Check connectivity. 37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned.Mech to make it the active view. Draw the level 2 primary duct 36 In the Project Browser.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. On the Options Bar. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. ■ ■ ■ 82 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. and double-click 2 . and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists. specify a 2900mm offset. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. You will size the primary in a later exercise. and Angle is cleared. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. Do not size the primary.

and double-click 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Resolve a routing conflict on level 1 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. Finally.Mech to make it the active view. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. In this exercise. 39 In the Save As dialog. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Resolving Routing Conflicts Often as you create ductwork. You can resolve these conflicts manually or automatically. click the Training Files icon. Open the m Resolving Routing Conflicts. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise. 38 If you want to save your work. you encounter routing conflicts such as the placement of fittings that prevents a duct connection. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. 2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. and notice that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. navigate to the folder of your choice. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. you use the Routing Solutions tool to automatically resolve duct routing conflicts with the high pressure supply air primary duct by selecting from a series of routing solutions. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 83 . While drawing duct.

press Tab once. and click Finish. However.3 Place the cursor over the primary duct run. 6 Select Solution 1. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions. click Routing Solutions. you will use the solutions to resolve the routing conflict. 84 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that 2 end control points display enabling you to modify the duct ends in any direction. The selected primary duct run displays in red. and click to select the primary and its fittings.

and click to specify the end point. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. 10 Draw the duct from the primary air connector to the centerline of the primary below. 11 Place the cursor over the primary. Next. 9 In the Type Selector. 8 Right-click. you check connectivity. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 85 . 7 Select the VAV box. and press TAB twice. and click Draw Duct from the context menu.The 45 degree elbows are replaced by a 90 degree elbow. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected.

IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts. 86 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Considering that both ends of the primary are open. In the next exercise. Before sizing the primary. and double-click 2 . This determines the airflow direction.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Velocity. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. Open the m Duct Sizing . In this exercise. You viewed various routing solutions and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts. click File menu ➤ Save. you size the high pressure supply air primary duct. select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary. enter Resolving Routing Conflicts Training for File name. The routing solution and connection are shown below. 17 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After resolving the conflicts. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to modify those solutions. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. the Routing Solutions tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. 14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. 16 If you want to save your work.All connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts. click the Training Files icon. and click Save. Resolve a routing conflict on level 2 13 In the Project Browser. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method.Mech to make it the active view. 15 Using the process that you just learned. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes but you have yet to sized the primary. you manually drew duct to connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. navigate to the folder of your choice. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. then connect the VAV to the primary. However.

5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18. Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. right-click the Design Bar. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 1 . and click Mechanical. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. and after the end point snap displays. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click to place the endcap.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. click Duct Fitting. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 87 . NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. and click to select it.

click Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.5 m/s. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. Under Constraints. Verify that Only is selected. ■ 88 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and enter 12.The selected primary displays in red. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK. under Sizing Method. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 9 On the Options Bar.

So. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. and press TAB twice. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. modify the layout. 13 Using the process that you just learned. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. modify the duct manually.The sized left primary is shown below. You can either relocate the VAV box. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. Next. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 89 . 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. or reinsert duct fittings. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary.

and double-click 2 . the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run.The sized right primary is shown below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. 90 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Mech to make it the active view. As in level 1. 14 Using the method you have learned. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. Size the level 2 primary duct run 15 In the Project Browser.

Open the m Duct Color Scheme. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme legends throughout your design. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 91 . 5 In the Type Selector.Mech Duct Classes for Name. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called HVAC. click File menu ➤ Save. right-click 1 Mech. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Save. enter Duct Sizing . right-click the Design Bar. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click Mechanical. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. and click OK.Velocity Training for File name.19 If you want to save your work. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. 2 In the Project Browser.Mech is created and becomes the active view. you sized the primary duct for the building. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . enter 1 . navigate to the folder of your choice. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Then. Like room color scheme. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. First.Mech. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. right-click Copy of 1 . duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. 20 In the Save As dialog. and click to place the legend. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. 3 In the Rename View dialog. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary.

delete the existing text.5 m/s. click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box. Select By range. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. In the Color column. click in the second row. and enter low velocity for the first row. and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. click Edit Color Scheme. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity for Color. you change the color scheme. In the At Least column. ■ ■ ■ Click OK. and on the Options Bar. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area.8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and enter 7. Next. In the Color column. 92 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the Caption column. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. select the duct color scheme legend that you placed. and click OK. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. and enter high velocity for the second row.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click File menu ➤ Save. Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2 .Mech is created and becomes the active view.Mech. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 93 . and click Rename. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. enter 2 . The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. Using the same color scheme allow you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 . right-click 2 Mech. 15 In the Type Selector. and click OK. and click to place the legend. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them. 18 If you want to save your work. and click Save. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Mech Duct Classes for Name. navigate to the folder of your choice. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. 13 In the Rename View dialog. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Save As dialog. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number.Equal Friction. To accomplish this. You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. and click Show. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. then press F9. you split the duct main into multiple pieces. 5 In the Element(s) In View dialog. you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click in the drawing area to make it active. such as Mechanical Supply Air 6. you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. If the System Browser does not respond. press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it.Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system. Open the m Duct Sizing . You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. expand the Mechanical systems folder. 3 Right-click Supply Air. you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. Finally. not ductwork (physical connections).Mech to make it the active view. such as a VAV box and diffusers. Every supply air system that you created is listed. and double-click 1 . and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. In the next exercise. 2 In the System Browser. and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method In 2 previous exercises. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. In this exercise. TIP If the System Browser is closed. and click Expand All. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3. you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. The 1 .In this exercise. click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size. 94 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser. you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method. First.

Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. 7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. and split the main 2400mm from the end of the main. move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. click (Split). TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. 10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. 9 With the Split tool open. and click to select them. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 95 . and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main.Split the main 6 On the Tools toolbar. split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning of the main. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded. Notice that as the airflow decreases. do the following: ■ ■ Select Equal Friction. Click Tags. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. under Category. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. click Tag ➤ By Category.65 Pa/m. 16 In the Tags dialog. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.12 On the Options Bar. you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Click OK. and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. 96 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Cancel. 15 On the Options Bar. The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at . ■ IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. Next. Clear Leader. click Sizing. and click to place each tag. for Ducts. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. under Sizing Method. transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. ignore this warning. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and enter . 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main. Under Constraints.

21 In the Save As dialog. Inspecting Air Systems In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. In this exercise. Inspecting Air Systems | 97 . Open the m Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 2 Right-click in the view. Finally. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement. click the Training Files icon. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow. you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments. and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems.TIP To reposition a tag. 20 If you want to save your work.Mech to make it the active view. enter Duct Sizing . 1 In the Project Browser. select the tag and drag it to a new location. and click Save. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2. In the next exercise. Using this tool. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. First. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. navigate to the folder of your choice. and double-click 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Equal Friction Training for File name. pressure. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized. 19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool.

select any duct segment. 6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar.You will inspect this system. Right-click a system from the System Browser. After the System Inspector opens. pressure. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. A tooltip also displays the system information. diffuser. click Inspect. and click Inspect from the context menu. select (Inspect). 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. 5 On the Options Bar. System tools display on the Options Bar. and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. duct fitting. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. 98 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . IMPORTANT To select a system. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click . Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow.

you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. 10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. also known as the critical path. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment. Inspecting Air Systems | 99 . 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. These are not logically connected to this system. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. Next. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure.

The primary is physically but not logically connected. For example.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. Placing Air Conditioning Units In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. and pressure information for various systems in the project. and click Rename. enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction. Create a new roof plan view 1 In the Project Browser. You also compared system information across a system. 100 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. 4 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Save. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. airflow. In a later exercise. under Graphics. you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. 17 In the Save As dialog. the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected.13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. select Mechanical for Discipline. and click OK. A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view. navigate to the folder of your choice. you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Open the m Placing AC Units. right-click Roof. you place 2 AC units. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. and click View Properties. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 Click OK. 3 Enter Roof Mech for Name. and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. right-click Copy of Roof. In the next exercise. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 16 If you want to save your work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). 12 Click to place the AC unit. 11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown.25 Ton .This specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. enter ZR. and then click Modify on the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton. select M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Add the AC Unit that services level 2 7 In the Roof Mechanical view. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 101 . Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap. 10 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room. 9 In the Type Selector. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top.

The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. and after the cursor is past the AC unit. and click to specify the section start point. A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 16 Move the cursor to the right. and click OK. Create a new section view 13 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Section. and click Properties. under Graphics. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. 19 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 102 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click to specify the section end point. 15 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 8 VAV box.Next. right-click Section 2.

AC units are level-based components. 24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators. 25 Select the AC unit. NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes. 23 On the View Control Bar. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line.20 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. click Medium for Detail Level. and click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 103 . Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. 21 On the Design Bar. notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 22 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. you must relocate it. To place the AC unit on the roof surface.

Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with the Section 2 view. and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. and adjust the depth view clip plane to capture the level 1 AC unit only. click to specify the move start point. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below. The AC unit placement is shown below. TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. (Remember to select the reference edge first). and after the end point snap displays. (300mm directly above the start point). and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . ■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below. Use the Move tool. Next. This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.25 Ton . place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures: ■ Work in the Roof Mech view. 104 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. 27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit. click to specify the move end point.26 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface. use the Align tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2 AC unit. Place the level 1 AC unit 28 Using the methods that you learned. Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to place it.

you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. enter Placing AC Units Training for File name. you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. 30 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. and click Save. you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. navigate to the folder of your choice. ■ 29 If you want to save your work. 2 Select the section box. First.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.■ Using the new Section 3 view with Medium detail level. The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. relocate the AC unit 300mm above the roof level to place the AC unit on the roof surface. Modify the 3D Mech view 1 In the Project Browser. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 105 . and double-click 3D Mech to make the view active. click the Training Files icon. you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. click File menu ➤ Save. Completing the Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. Then. Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems. and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. In the next exercise.

If you like. 4 Use the Spin button on the Dynamic View dialog. you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. the active view is the only open window. Tile the views 5 With the 3D Mech view active. Note that if this option is unavailable. if you do this. you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 On the View toolbar. Next. click (Dynamically Modify View). you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. 106 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . drag the mouse to spin the model as shown.The entire building including the AC units display. Remember that. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. and while pressing the middle mouse button. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and drag the mouse to spin the model. TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button.

do the following: ■ Enter 1700 for W: (width). Enter -750 for Offset. TIP When drawing duct. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. the connector snap displays.6 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 12 Click to specify the duct riser start point. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Roof Mech view. and press Tab. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 107 . This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. 10 In the Type Selector. TIP When tiling 2 views. 8 Zoom the view in both windows as shown. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. and 500 for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. you did not begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. under Mechanical. select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 7 Enter WT to tile both windows. place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection. 14 On the Options Bar. click Duct. the active view is tiled to the left. You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. 13 Move the cursor up to begin drawing duct and press Spacebar to match the duct size and offset to the AC supply connection size and offset.

Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 108 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . If the 2 are different. Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2. and then the duct continues horizontally for 1050mm.The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system. 16 Click Modify on the Design Bar. enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end point. connections are automatically created. 2900mm. 17 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components. and after listing dimensions display. 15 Move the cursor up.

On the View Control Bar. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 . 20 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.Mech view. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display.Mech to make it the active view.Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 109 . 18 Close the Roof Mech view. but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 19 In the Project Browser. and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 .Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit. Notice that only the duct riser displays.Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted. You now switch to the 2 . double-click 2 . TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level.

and after the mid point snap displays. The selected items display in red. and while pressing CTRL. select the adjoining elbow. 23 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow. 110 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select 450. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Duct. 25 In the Type Selector. 22 In the 2 Mech view. For Offset. select Round Duct : Taps. The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. Verify that Auto connect is selected.21 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment. verify that 2900 is specified. click to specify the start point. select the horizontal primary segment. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 111 . click to specify the end point. 29 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. 30 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. The left primary is connected to the AC unit. and after the centerline snap displays.28 Move the cursor over the primary.

and place the cursor over the end connector. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. 33 Select the right primary duct. 112 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Next. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment. 32 In the 2 . 31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.Mech view.

click to specify the duct segment end point. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall.34 Drag the connector to right. . or by right-clicking a connector. if you use the Create Similar tool. and after the centerline snap displays. 35 Select the primary duct. click and draw the primary to the left over the wall. However. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. 37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 113 . NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct. 36 On the Edit toolbar. click (Create Similar). and after the connector snap displays.

39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser. and click to specify the segment end point. 114 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .38 Draw the primary down 1000mm. and click to specify the end point. 40 The primary duct is created and connected to the riser.

You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 115 .41 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Create Similar tool. you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. Check connectivity 43 In the 2 . place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice. 42 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. However.Mech view.

116 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. click to add the endcap. Add endcaps 44 In the 2 . 47 Place your cursor over the top edge.Mech view. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. 46 In the Type Selector. zoom in on the duct riser. 45 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar.The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. click Duct Fitting.

Verify endcap placement 52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement.. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. 50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 117 . TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. 51 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. click to add the endcap. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. 49 In the Type Selector.48 With the Duct Fitting tool open.

Mech view to make it active. 53 In the 3D Mech view. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. Create the high pressure supply air system. verify the duct riser endcap. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 56 With the 2 views tiled. and then validate its geometry. 55 Press Tab to check connectivity. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Next. 118 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click in the 2 . 57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner.A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. 54 Using the 2 views.

58 On the Options Bar. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 119 . All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. and then select Mechanical Equipment. click Check None. click selected VAV boxes to it. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. 62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active. (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the 61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system.Mech view range. and select the level 2 AC unit. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and click OK. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . 59 In the Filter dialog.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. In this case. 60 On the Options Bar.

67 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 24 to view the VAV boxes. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. This is the system that you just created. all system components must be logically connected by a system. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. 68 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. expand Mechanical. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. However. and click Select. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed 66 Expand M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components.You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. In the Unassigned folder. Supply Air. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. 63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. 65 In the System Browser. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. or even without ductwork.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 24 system listing. 120 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Validate the primary supply air system 64 Press F9 to open the System Browser. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child).

and enter 1050mm. click Inspect. ■ ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 121 . Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. 74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. The System Inspector tool opens. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar.Mech drawing area to make the view active. move the cursor down. 76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 1700mm width. 73 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. and click Inspect. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. Click the supply connector. Inspect the primary supply air system 69 In the System Browser. 70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and a 500mm height. 2900mm. 72 Click a blank space in the 2 . Next. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. Specify the offset to -4400mm. 75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. click Inspect. duct fitting. Complete the level 1 supply air system 77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. diffuser. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. you inspect the system. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. Next. 71 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar.

Watch for the centerline snap as shown.Mech view (if open). select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . and tile it to the left of the 3D Mech view. In the 1 .This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view.Mech view. open the 1 .Mech view. ■ 122 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. and remember to zoom the view. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. Instead of drawing duct. The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. select the left primary duct segment. ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 123 . ■ In the 1 . release the mouse button. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view.■ Connect the primary to the AC. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. and after the edge highlights. Use Tab to check duct connectivity.Mech view.

and for duct sizing. and click Save. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. and inspect the system with the System Inspector. In this exercise. you check the systems in your project. In this exercise. and validated these logical connections. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and quickly target those systems that need attention. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. Validate the system using the System Browser. ■ 78 If you want to save your work. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. Using tiled windows. navigate to the folder of your choice. you need to validate them. 79 In the Save As dialog. 124 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes.■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. In the next exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and for duct sizing. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. thus assigning the components to a system. As you view the warnings. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In the System Browser. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. Then. So. click the Training Files icon. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. Checking Air Systems | 125 . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. as a tutorial exercise. Open the m Checking Air Systems. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. After you assign the system components to a system. For example. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. click Check Duct Systems. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. the duct is now associated with that system. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. However.

In the next lesson. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. you create hydronic piping systems. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. Then. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. and click Save. Depending on your air systems design. 6 Using the same methods.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. placing a circulator pump. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. and inspecting the piping system. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. 126 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. click File menu ➤ Save. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. You now confirm the systems that you created. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. TIP If you have multiple views open. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems.The red lines represent the default logical connection. Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. 10 If you want to save your work. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 8 Right-click Supply Air. navigate to the folder of your choice. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. In this exercise. 11 In the Save As dialog. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. otherwise click Close. 9 Right-click a system. and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components.

For Bottom. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Mech is created and becomes the active view. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and enter 950mm for Offset. 2 In the Project Browser. clear Grids. you create new views in which to design the piping system. click properties. right-click Copy of 2 . under Graphics. 3 In the Rename View dialog.IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Piping Views | 127 . 9 In the View Range dialog. and click Edit for View Range. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and under Visibility. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. Under View Depth. and the systems to logically connect the system components. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. 6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset.Piping for Name. First. and click OK. you change the view range. and click Rename. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators. click the Training Files icon. pipes. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . Open the m Creating Piping Views. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. scroll down to the Extents category. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Piping view selected in the Project Browser. After completing the air systems lesson.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. and enter -3500 for Offset. and enter -3500mm for Offset. a boiler. Next. circulator pump. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. 7 Click OK. A new view called Copy of 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. click the Annotation Categories tab. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 2 Mech. for Level. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. enter 2 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the view Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline.

you do not need to type measurement symbols. it will be best to create filters. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. and verify that equals is selected. do the following: ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. the system filters are not used. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. 11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. In this lesson. 14 Click Edit/New. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. select Mechanical Equipment. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. just enter the value. click the Filters tab. and click OK. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. you can add and activate filters. click 16 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. 17 Under Categories. (New). Create and define filters 12 In the 2 . click in the drawing area to make the view active. 128 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. under Filters. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. Also notice that 2 . The 2 . 18 Under Filter Rules. So. and press Tab. On the Filters tab. 13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Considering this.NOTE When entering a value. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. and enter VG. However. For example.Piping view. they will not filter all system elements needed. however. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. 10 Click OK twice. 15 In the Filters dialog.

click Air Terminals. and click OK. you may want to select each component type separately. Click Apply. So. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. . under Identity Data. click (Properties). NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. This is the same rule for using formulae. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. Verify that none is selected for And. 19 In the Filters dialog. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. 25 In the Type Selector. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. under Filters. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. click Air Terminal. such as family name. otherwise the filter will not work. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. Depending on the filter criteria. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. you must spell both verbatim. click 20 Enter Air Terminals for Name. To do this. Next. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. Creating Piping Views | 129 . and verify that equals is selected.■ ■ ■ Select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV for the family name. However. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). select Description for Filter by. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. return. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. you need a define common filter criteria. type name. 29 Click Apply. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. click Edit / New. you create a description as the common filter criteria. 22 Under Filter Rules. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). 26 On the Options Bar. or even a description that you define. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. 23 Enter Air Terminal for the description. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. This adds a description for all Exhaust Air Grill air terminals of the type M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. 21 Under Categories. system type. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. enter Air Terminal for Description. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. and click OK twice.

you need to define the filter again. 33 Click OK twice.Next. To filter multiple duct fitting types. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. and enter VG. ■ ■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. For Type. verify that equals is selected. And: Type Name.200 Neck. Category: Flex Ducts. and click Apply. By selecting each air terminal type separately. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. And: Type Name. verify that equals is selected. you will not see the Description type parameter. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . Filter by: System Type. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . Category: Duct Fittings. you specify a family and a type name. So. Filter by: Family Name. Because you already entered the description. 37 On the Filters tab. Filter by: Family Name. verify that equals is selected. and select Air Terminal. and select Round Duct for the family name. you need a common filter criteria. Category: Ducts. So. click Edit/New. Category: Ducts. then the type parameters will not display. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. you can select it. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. This is because the selected supply. Remember. you filter duct fittings by system type. you continue to create and define the filters. do the following: ■ ■ For Family.Piping view to make it active. verify that equals is selected. Filter by: Family Name. select M_600x600 . Round Ducts. Remember to click Apply. click in the Value column for Description. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. click the Filters tab. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. Next. 130 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . verify that equals is selected. verify that equals is selected. 36 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. ■ Flex Ducts . 34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. 32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.Duct Fittings. 38 Using the methods that you just learned. Next. Category: Ducts. 39 Click OK. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter.Round Connection. return. 31 Under Identity Data. verify that equals is selected. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name.Round. 35 Click in the 2 . create the following new filters according to the specifications. If you did not click Apply. if differences exist in the selected elements. and enter Supply Air for system type name. Filter by: Family Name.

47 Right-click in the drawing area. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. 41 In the Add Filters dialog. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. You used this duct to create the duct riser. right-click 1 Mech. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.Piping for Name. 43 Click OK. click Add. This is because you have not added them. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. Next. and click OK. All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. right-click Copy of 1 . You now define the view properties. 45 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. Add and activate filters 40 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click View Properties. A new view called Copy of 1 . Creating Piping Views | 131 . Create the level 1 piping view 44 In the Project Browser. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. 46 Enter 1 . 42 Under Visibility. do the following: ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. and click OK. Next.You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. you activate the filters. you add and activate the filters. Next.Mech is created and becomes the active view. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 48 In the Element Properties dialog.Mech. select all of the filters that you created. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.

Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. The 1 . 51 In the Element Properties dialog.Piping view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline.Piping view displays the new view settings. ducts. Create the 3D Piping view 54 In the Project Browser. 132 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. scroll down to the Extents category. If you turn off ducts visibility. 55 In the Project Browser. you change the view range. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe connection). 52 In the View Range dialog. and click View Properties. under Primary Range. you will be unable to view the duct riser. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 3000 is specified for Top Offset. 50 Click OK. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and fin-tub radiators from displaying.■ ■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. Next. 59 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. 49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. click the Filters tab. and to create the level 1 piping system. You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. under Graphics. Unlike the 2 . you will want to validate the geometry. 57 Right-click in the drawing area. As you create the pipe runs. right-click 3D Mech. and click Edit for View Range. and under Visibility. Next. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. such as halftone architecture. 53 Click OK twice. click the Annotation Categories tab. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. clear Grids. 56 Enter 3D Piping for Name. and click OK.

60 On the Filters tab. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. navigate to the folder of your choice. 63 Click OK. and click OK. 65 Click OK. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. In the next exercise. 66 If you want to save your work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Save. select all of the filters that you created. 1 In the Project Browser. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. select M_Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : M_25 NPT. and double-click 2 . This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. you place the radiators and a boiler. click Mechanical Equipment. clear Section Box to turn it off. 61 In the Add Filters dialog. right-click the Design Bar. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. You also created filters to display certain system components. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 133 . click Add.Piping to make it the active view. 62 Under Visibility. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. 67 In the Save As dialog. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. and click Piping. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. click File menu ➤ Save. You used this duct to create the duct riser.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. under Extents.

6 Zoom in on Office 6 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 134 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . except for the windows on the radius wall. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. 8 Click to place the radiator. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall.5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. 7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component.

If parameters are blank. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. If the same type of component exists on another level. and you do not want to include it.25 for Flow. then these are different across the selected objects. verify that 1. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0. right-click a radiator.25 L/s is specified for all of the selected radiators. 12 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. drag the section tail. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. If so. All level 2 radiators display in red. and click OK. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 135 . and click Select All Instances. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. you place the boiler. you modify the radiator flow rate.Piping to make this the active view. Next. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. 14 Enter . IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. click . Next. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. under Mechanical Loads. double-click 1 . for Flow. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area.

and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from the Type Selector. 136 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you verify the boiler flow rate. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. under Type Parameters. Next. 20 In the drawing area. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser.16 Enter ZR. click Mechanical Equipment. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. watch the listening dimensions. right-click the boiler. and click Element Properties.50 L/s is set for Max Flow. and click to place the boiler 1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown. You can filter the air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. verify that 14.

click in the drawing area to make it active. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. after you placed the radiators and boiler. Thus. analyses cannot be performed. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. In the next exercise. 23 If you want to save your work. As you assign radiators to systems. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. if all system components are assigned.22 Click OK. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating the Piping Systems | 137 . click the Training Files icon. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. navigate to the folder of your choice. and double-click 2 . After creating the logical connection. During this exercise. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. Open the m Creating Piping Systems. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. and then create the logical connection between these system components. Unlike logical connections (systems).Piping to make it the active view. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. you create the supply and return piping systems. click File menu ➤ Save. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. If the System Browser does not respond. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. click System Browser. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. then press F9. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 24 In the Save As dialog. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. So. and click Save.

(Select Equipment for System). click supply system. right-click. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). and select the boiler to assign it to the Notice that you can select only valid system components. all other components are unavailable. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator.Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. All level 2 radiators display in red. Notice that after you click . the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. 138 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Select All Instances. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.

the boiler (the parent) to downstream. 9 On the Options Bar. Next. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. and select the boiler to assign it to the return system. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. Thus. Creating the Piping Systems | 139 . It does not indicate a pipe layout path. press Tab. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. Notice that is does not display.The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. right-click. The organization is from upstream. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. you create the return piping system. This display indicates that the new system is selected. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. 10 On the Options Bar. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. So. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. and click Select to select the system. click . and select the system. Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator.

14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. and click Save. 17 If you want to save your work. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. In this exercise. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. These listings represent the systems that you just created. navigate to the folder of your choice. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. and cleared from the Options Bar. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. in the next exercise. 18 In the Save As dialog. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. 15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. or even without pipe being drawn. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. 13 Right-click each category. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. 140 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. and click Select. expand Piping. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings.11 The return system displays in red TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children).

Creating Pipe Runs | 141 .Piping view range highlight. Open the m Creating Pipe Runs. 1 In the Project Browser. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. and then select Mechanical Equipment. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. Notice that all components that are in the 2 . you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click Check None. and double-click 2 . 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Piping to make it the active view. In a later exercise.Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. 4 In the Filter box.

6 In the Select a System dialog. You will need to select a system to create the layout. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. the boiler.The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . select Hydronic Supply 1. The system displays in red. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. 7 Click OK. Notice that the radiators. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. then the Select a System dialog will open.Piping view) TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. 5 On the Options Bar. click Layout Path. you can place the cursor over a radiator. 142 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. Then. the return system that logically connects the components display in red.

It does not reference the architecture. 11 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and select solution 5. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Next. ■ Verify that 0. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run.00° is specified for Slope. verify that Solutions is selected. verify that Main is selected. Using this inset. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. ■ Enter 300 for Inset. Enter -375mm for Offset. 10 On the Options Bar. Later in this exercise. 12 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. click Settings. 8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. ■ Click (Next Solution). NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. Creating Pipe Runs | 143 .The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. 9 On the Options Bar. you create the supply pipe run 300mm from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators.

13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall.This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 3275mm in the level 1 plenum space. 15 Click OK. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. 144 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 17 In the drawing area. select Branch. For more information. 14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. structural beams. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 16 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. zoom the view. click Modify. and other obstacles. or architecture. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. The layout path is located under the radiators. refer to Help. you now modify the layout path. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Enter -375 for Offset. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes.

A drag control displays. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path. Creating Pipe Runs | 145 . 18 Using the drag control.

19 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. or offset elevations are incorrect. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted. select a different layout solution. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. For example. Either relocate the system components. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and is not part of the system. 20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the pipe. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. 146 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Change the geometry display 21 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 6. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. 22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. Creating Pipe Runs | 147 . Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. select Fine for Detail Level. To turn off hidden lines. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. If a pipe is hidden by an object. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. This is caused by the hidden line setting. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display.

it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. 148 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .23 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. and click to select them. On the View Control Bar. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. Additionally. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. 25 Place the cursor over the pipe. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter. So. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. Instead of moving the pipe. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. Medium for 2-line duct display. Next. Modify the pipe run 24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. The design requires 2 zones. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. select Coarse for single line display. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog.

you modify the supply pipe run diameter. Next. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). select 25mm for D: (diameter). 28 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. Creating Pipe Runs | 149 .26 Press Delete to delete the selection. 27 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. and click Modify on the Design Bar.

the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. width. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Next. 30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. then you know that a disconnect exists.The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm. If the entire network does not highlight. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. The first time you press Tab. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. If the pipes had different diameters. 150 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. fittings. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. Check connectivity 32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. the diameter would not display. press Tab 3 times. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. 33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. and equipment. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. 31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter.

Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected. Correct a piping disconnect 35 Zoom in on the radiator in Office 8 located in the lower-left corner. This allows you to better see disconnects. you can click to select them. This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping layout. Creating Pipe Runs | 151 . You need to correct the disconnect. 34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted.

You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. and select it. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. 37 Click the plus sign located to the left.Notice that the branch did not connect to the main when the pipe run was created. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. These plus signs are fitting conversion controls. Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display. Each control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation. You need to correct this disconnect by converting an elbow fitting to a tee and then drawing pipe to connect to the tee fitting. 152 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 36 Zoom in on the upper-right elbow.

39 Click the minus sign to convert back to the elbow fitting. TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. 40 Click the elbow fitting. 38 Click the tee fitting. Creating Pipe Runs | 153 . a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. A minus sign displays. and click the right plus sign.

Notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. 42 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. select Pipe Types : Standard. Draw pipe to correct disconnects 41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting. 44 Place the cursor over the end of the tee fitting. You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run. 154 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Pipe.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. and after the fitting end point snap displays. The Draw tool activates enabling you to create pipe. click to specify the pipe segment start point. 43 In the Type Selector.

click to specify the segment end point. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. If drawing contiguous segments. and after the connector snap displays. Creating Pipe Runs | 155 . use the connector snap. This automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object. 46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting. TIP When drawing pipe. to locate a connector and create the connection. the end point of current segment will be the start point of the next segment. If you do not use the connector snap.TIP When using the Draw tool to create pipe. . you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. 45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe. NOTE When drawing pipe. you specify a start point then move the cursor to create the pipe segment. If you pause briefly. Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment. and press Spacebar to match the offset (-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically. and then specify an end point. a connection may not occur. you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing.

and press TAB twice to check connectivity. 156 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line. and Spin buttons to verify that the level 2 supply pipe run geometry is as you expected. 51 On the View toolbar. 50 On the View Options Bar. use the Zoom. Validate the pipe geometry 49 In the Project Browser.The pipe segment is created connecting the radiator to the supply pipe run. The pipe branch including the tee fitting highlight indicating that they are physically connected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. 52 In the Dynamic View dialog. 48 Place the cursor over the pipe segment. 47 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. click (Dynamically Modify View). Scroll. Next. you validate the pipe geometry.

verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. For pipe conversion settings. and enter -525mm for both the main and branch offsets. Remember.Piping view. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. you create the return pipe run. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. Create the level 2 return pipe run 53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. Verify that 0.00° is specified for Slope.Next. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. Enter 600 for Inset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Pipe Runs | 157 . ■ In the Layout Path tool. Select Perimeter solution 3. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm.

click the Training Files icon. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. You checked connectivity. Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference. converted fittings. navigate to the folder of your choice.The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. 55 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. In this exercise. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. 54 If you want to save your work. corrected disconnects. 158 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click File menu ➤ Save.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. In the next exercise.

4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31). Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell.Piping to make it the active view. and click to specify the section head location. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. After you add the section. click Section. click Zoom in Region. and the second click specifies the section tail.1 In the Project Browser. The first click specifies the section head. and double-click 2 . you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. Resolving Pipe Interference | 159 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.

A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. 160 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.

NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. under Graphics. The section relocates under Piping. Resolving Pipe Interference | 161 . 8 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. click Modify. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. right-click Section 4. 11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). select Fine for Detail Level. The section head and tail display. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 4 view. select Piping for Sub Discipline. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 7 On the Design Bar. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections.

15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. mechanical equipment placement. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . place the cursor over the top connector. Next. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs.Piping to make it the active view. 162 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 14 Zoom in on the stairwell.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. and after the connectors display. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. and other aspects of your systems design.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 163 . 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting.These connectors connect to the tee fittings. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. 18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. and after the fitting end point snap displays. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. release the mouse button to reconnect it.

NOTE When modifying pipe. 164 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to 3000mm above the bottom pipe segment connector as shown. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. click (Split). You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. fittings. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. 21 On the Edit toolbar. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. Next. and select the return pipe segment again. and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment connector above. If you split the pipe. you split the supply pipe segment. always connect to pipe segments. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. 19 Zoom out.

move the cursor down. and draw the pipe around the stairs. 24 With the Split tool open. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. Next. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. Zoom out the view.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the bottom pipe segment connector. Resolving Pipe Interference | 165 . 25 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. and press Delete to delete it. 26 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. you convert a tee fitting. 27 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs.

and after the end point connector snap displays. convert the tee fitting from a vertical orientation to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. 32 Zoom out the view. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and move the cursor to the left. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. 29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. 33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. 166 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. 30 In the Type Selector.28 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned in the previous lesson. Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting.

click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. click to specify the segment end point. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. NOTE When drawing pipe. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. Resolving Pipe Interference | 167 . and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. 35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right.34 Draw the pipe down. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. and after the connector snap displays.

This activates the Draw tool.The return pipe run is connected as shown. 38 Right-click the lower connector. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. 36 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. 37 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. 168 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process.39 In the Type Selector. 43 On the Edit toolbar. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. First. Move a pipe segment to correct a routing issue 41 Zoom on the top horizontal pipe segment. Second. 40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. 42 Click the pipe segment to select it. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. Notice that the pipe segment is routed in the stairwell wall. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. or width and height. specify the reference or start point of the object that you want to move. This needs to be corrected. click (Move). click to specify the move start point. the pipe diameter. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. specify the move destination or end point. Resolving Pipe Interference | 169 . However. 44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays.

and after the listening dimensions appear. Next. and press ENTER to specify the move end point. The interference has been resolved. enter100. 170 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged. Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 47 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). 46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity. This moves the pipe segment up 100mm away from the wall but still allowing space for sizing.45 Move the cursor up. you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase.

50 On the View Control Bar. Otherwise. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 49 Press ESC. and adjust the view clip planes as shown.The section displays in red. 54 On the Edit toolbar. Resolving Pipe Interference | 171 . 53 Zoom in on the stairwell. you may get a false positive result. watch the listening dimensions.Piping to make it the active view. click (Split). 48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. 56 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 1500mm from its left connector. 52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 57 Using the methods that you learned. 51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. Although this section was used for air systems. select Fine for Detail Level. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. and split the supply pipe at 3600mm from its left connector. and double-click the section head to open the section view. 55 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe.

using the methods that you learned. 172 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. 58 Again. Remember to watch for connector snaps. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

(3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. Draw. Using Create Similar. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height).59 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. Then. you used the Split. Using these 2 methods. and offset are automatically specified.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. navigate to the folder of your choice. preferably a connector snap. Connecting the Boiler | 173 . 60 If you want to save your work. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. diameter (or width and height). You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. Remember that after you create pipe. the start point. Open the m Connecting Boiler. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. 61 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. In this exercise. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. In the left pane of the Open dialog. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. (2) Connect to a snap. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. and click Save. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 1 In the Project Browser. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. the pipe type is also matched. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment.

This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. and double-click 2 . Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. the active view is tiled to the left. TIP When tiling 2 views. You will design in the 2 . Note that if this option is unavailable. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Piping to make it the active view.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 174 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown.

13 On the Options Bar.8mm. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Enter -1500 for Offset. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at 460mm from the boiler connection. This negative offset is based on level 2 because you are designing in the level 2 view. and after the connector snap displays. 10 In the Type Selector. Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176. watch the listening dimensions. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 2150mm from level 1.8 Zoom in on the boiler. 14 Move the cursor to the left. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. ■ Verify that Angle is cleared. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. Connecting the Boiler | 175 . click Pipe.

and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. 3275mm from level 1. after listening dimensions display. enter -375 for Offset. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. In a later exercise. 176 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP When drawing pipe. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). Remember to always use a semi-colon (.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. 17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run.) to separate snap increments. zoom the view and try again. and click to specify the end point. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. 15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm. 16 On the Options Bar. click to specify the pipe segment end point.

20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. release the mouse button to connect to it. and after the connector snap displays. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 177 .The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar.

22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 178 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

28 Click in the 2 . click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. 27 In the 3D Piping view. and click it. Connecting the Boiler | 179 . right-click the right connector. 29 Zoom in on the tee. 26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned. 24 With the windows tiled. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler.Next. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. click the tee to display the connectors.Piping view to make it active. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.

31 On the Options Bar. and the start point is automatically specified. enter -375 for Offset. 33 Draw the pipe up. 30 In the Type Selector. 32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point. Verify that -1500 is specified for Offset. 35 With the Draw tool activated. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. connect the right supply pipe run. enter 900 and press Enter. This creates a 900mm pipe segment. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 180 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. and after listening dimensions display. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. In a later exercise. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. click to specify the end point.The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. 37 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. 34 On the Options Bar. Verify that Angle is cleared. 36 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool.

39 Validate the pipe geometry. Connecting the Boiler | 181 . 38 Check connectivity.The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler.

and right-click the return connector. Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 40 With the windows tiled. 43 On the Options Bar. zoom in on the boiler. 182 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -3396mm from level 2. and enter 150 and press Enter.Next. and that Auto Connect is selected. 44 Move the cursor up. 41 Select the boiler. This places the return connection 250mm above level 1.Piping the active view. 42 In the Type Selector. you draw a 150mm pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. and click to specify the end point. enter -525 for Offset. and the 2 . and click Draw Pipe. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1. Next. verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter). 45 On the Options Bar.

48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different level or plane. This routing situation provides an opportunity to learn more about the Auto Connect behavior.Piping and 3D Piping views are tiled to clearly view the Auto Connect behavior. Make certain that the 2 . the connection is not made. click to specify the end point. verify that Auto Connect is selected. Connecting the Boiler | 183 . If Auto Connect is not selected. IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located on a different level or plane. It is important that Auto Connect is not selected. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 47 On the Options Bar. you draw the return pipe to the left. an automatic connection is made. Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active. the left return pipe is routed under the supply pipe. As you draw.Next.

You see it clearly in the 3D view. 51 Select the return pipe segment. 49 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw tool. draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe. 53 Again. clear Auto Connect. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. and the pipe is automatically connected to the supply pipe above. click to specify the end point. and right-click the top connector.Notice that a green pipe riser symbol displays in the floor plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 52 On the Options Bar. 184 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 50 Press CTRL+Z to undo the connection and return to the pipe segment.

right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). This is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. 54 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. select Hidden Line. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. If a pipe is hidden by an object. and twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 55 Select the return pipe segment. press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. Next. click the specify the end point. TIP When drawing pipe. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. press ESC to deactivate the tool. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. In the floor plan view. You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. To turn off hidden lines. Connecting the Boiler | 185 .Notice that this time the pipe did not connect to the supply pipe above and a green pipe riser symbol did not display. On an open pipe segment or run. press it once to stop drawing the current object. 56 Draw the pipe to the left. If the pipe segment or run is closed. you finish connecting the boiler to both return pipe runs.

The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. 59 Zoom in on the boiler. 186 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 60 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. click to connect to the left return pipe run. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 58 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. and after the connector snap displays.57 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls.

and click Draw Pipe. 63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. and click to specify the end point. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.61 Select the tee fitting. 62 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right. click to specify the end point. right-click the right connector. Connecting the Boiler | 187 .

and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected.64 Using the method that you learned. 188 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. 65 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run.

you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler. 68 Using the section view creation method that you learned. Connecting the Boiler | 189 .67 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. Next. and adjust the view as shown. draw a section view.

69 Click Modify on the Design Bar. under Graphics. 71 Right-click in the drawing area. 73 On the View Control Bar. click View Properties. select Piping for Sub-Discipline. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe riser and the boiler. and click OK. click Fine for Detail Level. 190 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 70 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections. double-click Section 5 to open the Section 5 view. This locates the Section 5 view under Piping in the Project Browser and removes the ??? label. You can also double-click the section head to open the section view.

and after highlights. 76 With the 2 . First. click (Align).75 Close the Section 5 view but keep the 2 tiled views open. Connecting the Boiler | 191 . If the Tools toolbar is not available.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. 77 On the Tools toolbar. select the reference point where you want to align. Next. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools.Piping view. and then you select the point to align. click to specify the alignment reference point. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. in the 2 . 78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe.

NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. 192 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click to specify the point to align. 79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. and after the centerline highlights.

Connecting the Boiler | 193 .The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. 81 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool. 80 Using the alignment method you just learned. align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

194 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting. This is because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that we aligned. 83 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also parametrically adjusted.

Friction & Velocity. and double-click 2 . You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. In the next exercise. 84 If you want to save your work. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler. Open the m Pipe Sizing . and after it highlights. connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. you size the supply and return piping runs. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 85 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 195 .Piping to make it the active view. you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. click the Training Files icon. press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler. and click to select them. enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Finally. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Next.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs.The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

5 m/s for Velocity. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing. 196 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. ■ Click OK.00 Pa/m. Select And. or manually modify the pipe. 3 On the Options Bar. click Sizing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog. select a different layout solution. Under Constraints. and that Restrict Size is cleared. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and enter 250. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red. and enter 2. select Friction. The sized pipe runs are sized. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components.

8 If you want to save your work. enter Pipe Sizing . click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing. you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Placing Circulator Pumps | 197 .Friction & Velocity Training for File name. In this exercise. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry. Placing Circulator Pumps In this exercise. and click Save. 6 In the Project Browser. you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs. 9 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. navigate to the folder of your choice.Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe.

4 Enter WT to tile both windows. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and double-click 2 . the active view is the only open window. Note that if this option is unavailable. zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 3 In the Project Browser. You place the pumps in the 2 . the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown. 1 In the Project Browser.Piping view. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 .Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. TIP When tiling 2 views. Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 198 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views.Piping to make it the active view.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click to place the circulator pump. 9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool.7 On the Edit toolbar. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. 14 Place the cursor over to the left of the pipe opening. click (Split). click Mechanical Equipment. and after the centerline snap displays. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. select M_In-line Circulator : M_Standard. 13 In the Type Selector. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 15 Move the cursor over the pipe opening. Placing Circulator Pumps | 199 . 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. and press Spacebar to rotate the pump. Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. and make 2 splits on the left pipe 160mm from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

and watch for the centerline snaps. 200 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .TIP If you want to reposition the circulator pump. You can also use the Move tool for precise placement. drag the pump away from the pipe. 17 In the 3D Piping view. 16 Press ESC twice. notice that the pump is not located near the selection point. and then move it over the pipe opening.

To clear the selection. enter -1500 for Offset. under Constraints. 22 In the 2 . you connect the pump. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. and select Element Properties. 23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump. Next. click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Placing Circulator Pumps | 201 . The selected pump displays in red. click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 19 On the Options Bar. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment. click . If the pump remains selected.Actually.Piping view. you can click in the drawing area. You can also right-click the pump. or press ESC. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. and after the connector snap displays. click the pump. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset. 18 In the 2 . click Modify on the Design Bar. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 Click OK. release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click the pipe segment. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished.Piping view. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value.

25 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above. and press TAB. After connecting the pump. you need to check connectivity. 202 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump.Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. 24 Press ESC to clear the selection. 26 Place the cursor over the pump.

Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. Placing Circulator Pumps | 203 . 28 With the 2 . click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe. Next. 27 Using the methods that you just learned. and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view. you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

31 Click the rotation control on the right. 32 Using the method that you just learned. rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.30 Click the left pump to display rotation controls. 204 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Assign the pumps to the supply system 33 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. select the left supply pipe riser. As you learned in previous exercises. Immediately after placement. and so on) that you placed to a system. they move to their respective system folder. Expand the Piping folder.The in-line circulator pumps are rotated. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. After you assign the components to a system. click System Browser. You can also press F9. do the following: ■ ■ Expand the Unassigned folder. Placing Circulator Pumps | 205 . you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment. These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 34 In the System Browser. System tools display on the Options Bar. Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system. 35 In the 3D Piping view. Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder.

click Add To System. enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name. you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. 206 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. such as VAV boxes. Using the System Inspector. 41 In the Save As dialog. 40 If you want to save your work. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. pressure. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. click File menu ➤ Save. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. Finally. click Finish System. the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. and click Save. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. In this exercise. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. 37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 36 On the Options Bar. you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure. and by clicking the rotation controls. Inspecting Piping Systems In this exercise. you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. If you use this tool. click (Edit System). NOTE Do not click . 39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar.TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar. you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. boilers and AC units. 38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

You will inspect the hydronic supply system. flow. 4 Select the boiler. and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. mechanical equipment. System tools display on the Options Bar. and double-click 2 . the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number. click (Inspect). click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar.Piping to make it the active view. Inspecting Piping Systems | 207 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. and click OK. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler. fitting. After the System Inspector activates. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. 2 Right-click in the view. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. Right-click a system from the System Browser. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. A tooltip also displays this system information. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Select a System dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click Inspect. select any pipe segment. and click Inspect from the context menu. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. System tools appear on the Options Bar. and so on that you have assigned to a system. NOTE To select a system. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems. select Hydronic Supply 1. click the Training Files icon. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

also known as the critical path. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump. notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment. As you inspect. you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. Next. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. 208 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment.

use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. you check the piping systems. 15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. 17 If you want to save your work. double-click the 3D Piping view. you need to validate them. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps. 18 In the Save As dialog. and inspect a fin-tube radiator. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. flow. click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 16 Using the methods that you learned. and for pipe sizing. You also compared system information across a system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector. and click Save. Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. In this exercise. and quickly target those systems that need attention. you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction. Checking Piping Systems | 209 .11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. navigate to the folder of your choice. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch.

and for pipe sizing. and click Piping. Open the m Checking Piping Systems. the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click Check Pipe Systems. For example. you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.Piping to make it the active view. In the System Browser. click Check Duct Systems. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty. you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. However. the pipe is now associated with that system. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. As a tutorial exercise. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Warnings display.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. After you assign the system components to a system. right-click the Design Bar. you confirm the system component assignments. If the System Browser does not respond.” 4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. thus assigning the components to a system. Next. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. The piping system is logically and physically valid. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. double-click the 2 . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. then press F9. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. 210 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. click in the drawing area to make it active. A message appears indicating the no warning were found. Then. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. Next. check system warnings may occur.

Piping to make it the active view. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number. TIP If you have multiple views open. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . and click Expand All. The supply system that you created. collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 10 Using the same methods. Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components. you confirm the piping system assignments. otherwise. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply. click Close. Checking Piping Systems | 211 . The red lines represent the default logical connection. double-click 2 Mech to make it the active view.Because you assigned all piping components. you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 12 In the System Browser. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems. fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system.

and click Save. Finally. 3D. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems. a boiler. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. 212 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Explore different system designs. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. 17 In the Save As dialog. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. click File menu ➤ Save. specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation. and section views. In this exercise. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. Depending on your air systems design. 15 Using the methods that you learned.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical systems. the creation and modification methods remained the same. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. Design the system in the 1 . This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2008. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. In the lesson. it is a valid system without problems. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. circulator pumps.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. For pipe offset. In this tutorial. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. For additional practice. and fin-tube radiators. 16 If you want to save your work. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. parametrically modify those designs. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system.

go to http://www. 213 . After finishing each exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you learn to create electrical systems within the architectural model of a building project. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.Electrical Systems 3 In this tutorial. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can choose to save your work.autodesk. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. However. If the tutorial datasets are not present.

By creating views that are specific to the electrical system you will be able to design. The lighting and power plans are created by copying and renaming architectural views. apply templates to your views. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. 3 Click Wiring Types. in the Element Properties dialog for Rooms. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Value CU-THWN Copper 75 214 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. analyze. wiring. distribution systems. For this reason. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. click the Training Files icon.Planning Electrical Systems In this lesson you specify electrical settings. expand Wiring. and in the right pane. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Electrical Views. and modify your lighting and electrical systems in later exercises. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. power distribution systems. create views for the power and lighting systems at each level in the building. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan.rvt. You will create the following views for Level 1 and Level 2: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. the Limit Offset. Later. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design. and click Add. and demand factors that you will use in your project. then applying the appropriate template to each plan. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. in the left pane. wiring. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. For example. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. The electrical settings determine the voltages. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system.

Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 277 480 Value 120. By specifying a range.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00 V 480.Parameter Insulation Max Size Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value THWN 500 1.00 V 280. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.00 V Maximum 130.00 V 460.00 V Minimum 110. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 200.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 215 .00 V 260.00 V 208.00 V 220. For example.00 V 490. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.00 V 277.

For example. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 480/277 Wye Phase Three Three Configuration Wye Wye Wires 4 4 L-L 208 480 L-G 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. 8 In the right pane. NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. 9 Click Demand Factors. even though this is physically impossible. 216 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Red. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. click Distribution Systems. this type of system (High.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system.

Create views for your electrical plans 11 In the Project Browser.000VA 3. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. leave the default settings as shown here. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. or Other systems in your project based on their load. right-click Level 1. and rename it 1-Lighting.Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. and click OK. For this exercise. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range.000VA. ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. 13 In the Rename View dialog.000VA 10. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created. Power.000VA. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. and rename them as follows: ■ ■ 2-Power 2-Lighting Preparing the Electrical Plan | 217 . applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. enter 1-Power. For example. create another copy of level 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 10 Click OK. Create 2 copies of the level 2 floor plan. HVAC.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. 14 Using the same method. and click Rename. 12 Right-click Copy of Level 1.000VA 10. at any given time.

Create views for your electrical ceiling plans Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. and the view range. Load component families 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 25 Using the same method. TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu. right-click 1-Ceiling Elec. Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information. Lighting Plan. 23 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Rename View dialog. expand Ceiling Plans. and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the view. select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates. and Electrical Ceiling templates that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories. select the following families: ■ ■ M_Lighting Switches. right-click 1-Lighting. and click Apply View Template. apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view. 30 In the Project Browser. The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. select Power Plan from the list of templates. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view. right-click Level 1. which places the view under the Electrical branch in the project browser. and click OK. The Power Plan. 24 In the Select View Template dialog.rfa 29 Click Open. expand Families. 18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan.rfa M_Receptacle. and click OK. which further defines their position in the project browser. expand Electrical ➤ Devices. enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name. which are available from view templates. 28 While pressing Ctrl. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 218 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 21 In the Project Browser. right-click 1-Power. 15 In the Project Browser. the view discipline. 19 In the Project Browser. and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view. you need to apply settings. 22 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Rename. apply the Power Plan template to 2-Power. In the following steps you will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created. 20 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. and click Apply View Template. View templates let you easily control view properties. 16 Right-click Copy of Level 1. and click OK. and click OK. click Lighting Plan. The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project browser. 27 In the Open dialog. Apply templates to views Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline.

2 In the Project Parameters dialog.rvt. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. and established the parameters for your wiring. click Add. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans.rfa 32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. Later. and so on). As you loaded each of the component families. reopen the Electrical folder. has also been added under Lighting Device. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of rooms in your project.rfa electrical family from the Lighting Fixtures folder. selected components for your electrical systems. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. restrooms. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. distribution systems.rfa M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Defining Required Lighting Levels | 219 . enter Required Lighting Level for Name. and demand factors. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. click the Training Files icon. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). 31 Using the same method.Notice that an Electrical Fixtures ➤ M_Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. 33 You can save the open file if you wish. Open the provided dataset. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. in the Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. and load the following electrical families from the Equipment folder: ■ ■ ■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers. In this case the key style is the type of room and. “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219. 35 Proceed to the next exercise.Surface. conference rooms. In this exercise. containing several switch types. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. A Lighting Devices ➤ M_Lighting Switches folder. Under Parameter Data.rfa M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. voltages. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Lighting Levels. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.Surface. as described below. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of rooms (offices. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Group. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. select Electrical. move the cursor over the room in the upper-left corner. ■ Click Schedule keys. click to select the room. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. enter Room Lighting Requirements. you can look at the properties for one of the rooms. In the Element Properties dialog. Under Categories. The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. Select Instance. For Type.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog.Lighting category. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . and when the cross-hairs display. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Rooms for Category. 8 Click Cancel. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. 220 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . select Illuminance. However. there are many rooms in this project that have similar lighting requirements. click (Properties). select Rooms. select Electrical-Lighting. double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 4 Click OK twice. For Name. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each room. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on room type. To verify this.

The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. one for each type of room in the building. according to the values in the following table: Room Type Private Office Open Office Lounge Restroom Conference Mech/Elec Stair/Circulation Lighting Level (lx) 325 540 270 325 375 215 215 When completed. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of rooms in the project. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. ■ Click OK. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. the Key Schedule should looks like this: Defining Required Lighting Levels | 221 . click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule. enter Lighting Levels. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the Room component. 12 Click OK. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width.■ For Key Name. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each room type.

and for Lighting Level parameter. the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule. 19 Scroll up to the Electrical . For tutorial purposes. scroll down to the Identity Data category. right-click in the Room Lighting Requirements schedule. in the Element Properties dialog. In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms. then right-click one of the selections. 17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect. the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. click . click Properties and. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. Office). 16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan. Assign room keys to the rooms in the project 15 In the Project Browser. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 540 lx. assume you would have full access to this view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting Requirements key schedule. In a worksharing environment. and click Element Properties.Lighting category. and select Open Office.TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. and other users would not be able to perform operations covered in this exercise. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. then right-click. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Using the same method. Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Number 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name Open 1 Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Stairwell Office Office Office Key Name Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 222 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . under Instance Parameters. select multiple rooms of the same type (for example. 20 Click OK. NOTE Generally. While pressing Ctrl.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels | 223 . For example. if required. selecting a room type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. Room color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document.Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Number 19 20 21 2 6 7 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Name Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical/Electrical Open 2 Office Office Office Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical / Electrical Lounge Office Office Office Office Stairwell Conference Room Office Office Key Name Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. you could create a key schedule named Room Variables. Consequently. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. Room color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the room components. as described below. “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page 223. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component. and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to rooms based on specific room parameters. In this exercise you will create a room color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click Element Properties. for the Color.rvt. Under Title Text. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. and click (Duplicate). select Required Lighting Level. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. for Title. select Underline. select Required Lighting . for Name. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Required Lighting Level. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. select Show Title. enter Required Lighting Levels. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. 14 Click OK twice. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 6 For Color. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Color Fills. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. click Color Scheme Legend. enter Required Lighting. 7 Click OK. and place it in the drawing. and click OK. select Rooms for Category. click Edit/New. click the Training Files icon. 224 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

16 Make the Level 2 floor plan the active view. 17 Using the same method, activate the color scheme as you did for Level 1. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. You can have more than one color scheme in the project, but only one per plan. 18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels
In this exercise you create a room lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each room against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project, you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/- 55 lx range specified in the schedule. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 225

Create room lighting analysis schedule
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Rooms. For Name, enter Room Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK.

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane

Create a new schedule parameter
4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog, click Calculated Value. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, enter Average Estimated Illumination - Required Lighting Level.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:
■ ■ ■

For Sort by, select Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

8 On the Formatting tab, under fields, select Lighting Delta. 9 Click Conditional Format. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Field, select Lighting Delta. For Test, select Not Between. For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx in the text boxes.

226 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

11 Click the Background Color chip. 12 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, click the red color chip. 13 Click OK twice. 14 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Ceiling Reflectance, and click Field Format. 15 In the Format dialog:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use default settings. For Units, verify that Fixed is selected. For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

16 Click OK. 17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. 18 Click OK.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 227

Designing the Electrical System
In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices, electrical equipment, and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Once the equipment is in place, you will create power and lighting circuits, and make connections to electrical equipment.

Adding Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As you select and place lighting fixtures, the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each room’s lighting requirement. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Adding Lighting Fixtures.rvt.

Place the initial lighting fixture
1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules, and double-click Room Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column, and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance, Wall Reflectance, Floor Reflectance, and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Only the Number, Name, Average Estimated Lighting, and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 4 On the Windows menu, click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 6 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 1-Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid, and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.

228 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

8 In the 1-Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Light Fixture. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.

12 Click Modify. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).

14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to specify the start point.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 229

15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture, and click when Intersection displays.

In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx, closer to the required +/- 55 lx. The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.

Change line weight to adjust lighting fixture visibility
16 Right-click anywhere on the view background, and click View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Reflected Ceiling Plan: 1-Ceiling Elec dialog, scroll down to Lighting Fixtures, click in the Projection/Surface-Lines column, and click Override. 19 In the Line Graphics dialog, under Lines, for Weight, select 5. 20 Click OK 3 times.

230 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

The fixture you placed now displays as shown.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures
21 Select the lighting fixture, and on the Toolbar, click 22 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. 23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of the level 1, as shown. (Copy).

Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule
24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 231

The Average Estimated Illumination for rooms 3, 4 and 5 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these rooms.

To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room with a 2-lamp fixture. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

Change lighting fixture type
25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. 26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/- 55 lx range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. 27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

232 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 1

NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting fixtures to these rooms.
Level 2

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 233

28 In the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, right-click one of the headings, and click Unhide All Columns.

With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms should be white. 29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Lighting Switches” on page 234. In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.

Placing Lighting Switches
In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Switches.rvt.

Place switches in rooms
1 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 2 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 3 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole. 4 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

5 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of room 3.

234 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.

7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.
Level 1

8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way. 9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 235

10 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

11 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Four Way. 12 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.

236 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

13 In the open office area, place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Lighting to make it the active view. 15 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way, and place a switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 237

16 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.

238 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 2

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Placing Power Receptacles” on page 239.

Placing Power Receptacles
In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Receptacles.rvt.

Place wall-hosted receptacles
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

Placing Power Receptacles | 239

5 On the Options Bar, verify that

(Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

6 In the left side of the plan, place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.

7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown, including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.

240 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

1-Power

2-Power

Placing Power Receptacles | 241

Place floor-hosted receptacles
8 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard. 11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.

NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected by default. 12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.

When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.

13 Select the receptacle and click the room). 14 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).

(Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within

15 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor, as shown.

242 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

17 Draw a pick box around the four floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure, place 3 copies of the flipped receptacles throughout the Level 1 open office, as shown.

18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown. TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the 2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. 19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Placing Power Receptacles | 243

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244. In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports
In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. With the introduction of local energy codes, the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces, you can refer to this report rather than having to measure rooms and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Usage Reports.rvt. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, scroll down the Category list, and select Rooms. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and for Name, enter Power & Lighting Usage. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area

6 Click OK. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

244 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and work toward the higher voltage. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.7 You can save the open file if you wish. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. “Placing Electrical Equipment” on page 245. Dataset: ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Placing Electrical Equipment | 245 . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). as described below. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Open the provided dataset.

and double-click 1-Power. 6 On the Options Bar. select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Right-click the panel. select Electrical Equipment. 246 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click .Loads category. Add a transformer 10 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. under Electrical . under Instance Parameters. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. 11 In the Type Selector.Surface : M_250A. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms. click the Training Files icon.rvt. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Electrical Equipment.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Element Properties. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select 480/277 Wye. for Distribution Sys. click Electrical Equipment. and for Panel Name. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. scroll down to the Electrical . 9 Click OK. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser.Loads. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. and click to place the panel as shown. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical room to the right of the panel as shown. select M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : M_45kVA.

click .Loads category. and place the panel to the right of the transformer. 19 Click Modify. 16 Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. For Panel Name.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. 14 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. Placing Electrical Equipment | 247 . select 480/277 Wye. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. for Distribution Sys. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select 120/208 Wye. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. for Distribution Sys.Surface : M_100A. enter T1. scroll down to the Electrical . 20 Select the panel you just placed. select Electrical Equipment. enter L-1. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and for Panel Name. under Instance Parameters. 18 In the Type Selector. click . Since this is a transformer. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar.Loads category. scroll down to the Electrical . select M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . under Instance Parameters. 21 On the Options Bar.

A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. and click 30 On the Options Bar. In this case you are going to select something other than the panel.Surface : M_100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. 28 On the Options Bar. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. select panel L-2. 26 On the Options Bar.Surface : M_250A named H-2 M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2 M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 29 Select the transformer T2. 27 Click (Select Panel). The temporary circuit displays as shown. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click . and select panel H-2 for Panel. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. 248 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. . click (Create Power Circuit). including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel.

31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms side-by-side. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. . select the H-2 panel. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. select the L-1 panel. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. and on the Options Bar. 37 Close the 2-Power view. 34 In the 2-Power view. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. 38 On the Options Bar. Placing Electrical Equipment | 249 . click 35 On the Option Bar. click . and click 39 Click . and select the MDP panel. .

The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . click the Training Files icon. as described below. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and data systems. Circuits are used for power. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Power Circuitry. and click 41 On the Options Bar. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close.40 Select the T1 transformer. . 250 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 42 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). “Creating Power Circuitry” on page 250. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. Open the provided dataset. and select the MDP panel. lighting. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). click . select all the receptacles in the corner room. For now. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. Creating Power Circuitry | 251 . load (180 VA).2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. 4 On the Options Bar. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. 3 While pressing Ctrl. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. and voltage (120 V). 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room.

and select panel L-1 as the panel for this NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. click circuit. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. and press Tab. and click to select the circuit again. press Tab. 8 On the Options Bar. 252 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the room. 6 Click Modify. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. (Select a Panel for the Circuit).

click . all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. and select panel L-1. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. and click Element Properties. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. change the value from 20A to 50A. 1-#12. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. scroll down to the Electrical . click (Edit Circuit). The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise. 15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. select Circuit Properties. 22 Click OK. click . 19 Close the warning message. 1-#10. . The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. 1-#6. and ground wiring. When editing a circuit.11 On the Options Bar. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. neutral.Loads category. and add it to panel L-1. 1-#12. 12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar. Creating Power Circuitry | 253 . 21 In the Element Properties dialog. creating power circuits. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. The currently specified values are 1-#12. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. respectively for this circuit. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. 16 On the Design Bar. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. If you select L-1 in the drawing. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. and select panel L-1. click Cancel Circuit. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. click The circuit is created. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. under Instance Parameters. which are the wire sizes for the load.

27 Using the same procedures. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. These will be connected in a later exercise. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). 254 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . These will be connected in a later exercise. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. click . 29 Select the L-1 panel. 26 Continue creating circuits. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2.24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. as previously described. 28 Double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. and on the Options Bar. and then select panel L-1. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. 25 On the Options Bar. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. click .

1 In the Project Browser. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting. Open the provided dataset. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 255 . Finally. Adding wiring to a project is optional. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 31 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. you have assigned only 17. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. 30 Click OK. As you saw in the previous exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.In the Edit Circuits dialog. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything.

4 On the Options Bar. 256 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. and click OK. click . as shown. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. 5 In the Filter dialog. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 7 Close the message window and. 8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. click (Filter).

Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. click . and then select panel MDP as the panel for the circuit. or floors. click . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 257 . click .9 On the Options Bar. When creating wires. ceilings. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. 10 On the Options Bar. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. as in this step.

press Tab. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Hot Conductors. ground) in the wire run. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. enter 2. and click the switch to select the switches. and click OK. 16 Using the same method. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. and click OK. but with an additional vertex. click . In the next steps. lighting fixtures. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. 13 In the Filter dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. When this occurs. one neutral conductor. select Wires. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. you created arc type wiring. and assign the circuits to panel MDP. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 258 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. and one ground conductor). 12 On the Options Bar. Splined wiring is similar to arc. you can specify splined wiring. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex.In this step. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. neutral. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. click . Later. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. click Check None. enter 2 as the value. when you create wiring manually. 17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices.

and restrooms in the 2-Lighting view. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. Otherwise. then creating lighting circuits in 2-Lighting. These will be connected in a later exercise. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 259 . “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260.18 For more practice. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1-Lighting view. 20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. and assign the circuits to panel H-2. 19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. conference room. assign the circuit to panel H-2. lounge.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. 3 On the Options Bar. fixtures. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. and specify switch IDs for switches. 260 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . as described below. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. you will create a room schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs.21 You can save the open file if you wish. but does not prevent you from doing so. assign lighting fixtures to switches. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Switch Systems.rvt. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. and panel information. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Create Switch System).

When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch). Creating Switch Systems | 261 . click (Edit Switch System). 5 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. click Finish to confirm your selections. 6 On the Edit Switch System tab. After creating the switch system. 7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. The Edit Switch System tab is activated on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures.4 Click (Select Switch for System). click Remove From System. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system.

click . click Select Switch. 13 On the Options Bar. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 26 fixtures remaining in the system.West. click Finish System. . 15 On the Edit Switch System tab. and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’ restroom.1st Floor. and click OK. 9 Click Switch Properties. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. click Finish. 16 Click Switch Properties. enter Main Entrance . 18 On the Edit Switch System tab. click 14 Click . for Switch ID. 11 On the Edit Switch System tab. under Instance Properties. 20 Click . under Instance Properties. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. 262 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and on the Options Bar. for Switch ID. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. enter North Stairwell . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Finish System.8 On the Options Bar.

27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. enter Room Number. For Name. scroll down the Available fields list. select Rooms. and for Heading. enter Switch Systems. stairwell. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Number from the Fields list. and restrooms in the 1-Lighting view. 28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Verify that Ascending is selected. scroll down the Available fields list. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. Click OK. Creating Switch Systems | 263 .21 Using the same method. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 On the Formatting tab. select Number. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. conference room. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. click the Training Files icon. Open the provided dataset. Otherwise. as described below. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the room containing that system. continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. 264 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 30 For more practice. Create separate systems for the lounge. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and private offices. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264.2nd Floor for the switch ID. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. Specify Open Area . restrooms.

move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it.rvt. 9 On the Options Bar. and delete both home runs. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 265 . 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible. 5 Using the same method. 1 In the Project Browser.■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. 3 In the corner room. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. click Wire. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. 6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. 8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan. 4 On the Options Bar. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left side of the plan.

266 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . as shown. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the wire.10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top room to specify the start point for the wire. 11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire.

if necessary. The direction will be corrected. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower rooms. your layout should look similar to the following: Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 267 . Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible. When completed. and using the same method. when the wiring is completed.

Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the number of hot conductors. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. 14 Click Modify. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. as each room was added to the wiring run. and a shared safety ground). select Insert Vertex. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. a shared neutral. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. and click. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown. 17 Right click the wire run. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. In the previous steps. 268 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower room.

Completed 1-Power Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 269 . or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise. The wire behaves like a spline. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and 2-Power views. 19 For additional practice.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location.

Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Checking Your Design. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Checking Your Design ” on page 270. Open the provided dataset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. In this exercise. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. as described below. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 270 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .rvt. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser.

The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. Checking Your Design | 271 . 6 Right-click in a column heading in the System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 8 In the System Browser. 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. 5 Resize the columns in the System Browser until all of the columns are visible without scrolling. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the room in which the devices are located. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. collapse Power. and expand Unassigned. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser.4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. release the mouse button. each with a load of 180VA. 7 In the System Browser. The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power. and click Select.

11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. 15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. click . 16 Click Finish Circuit. 13 In the 1-Lighting view. 14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. In the System Browser. 17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. and on the Options Bar. click Add to Circuit.10 Open the 1-Lighting and 2-Lighting views and close any windows. click to create permanent wiring. press Tab. click to select the circuit. The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected. 272 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. and click OK.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. select Wires. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. 19 On the Options Bar. Checking Your Design | 273 . In the System Browser. 20 In the Filter dialog. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. 24 In the drawing area. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. enter 2. 25 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. click . select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. 21 Click . highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. and click OK. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. for Hot Conductors. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. press Tab. click Check None. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 23 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the 1-Lighting view.

select panel L-1. Check Circuits 29 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click Check Circuits.26 On the Options Bar. 28 Using the same method. 274 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 30 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. and in the Mechanical/Electrical room. to create permanent wiring. create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. click 27 Click .

Open the provided dataset. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Circuit Loads. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. Finally. In this exercise. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.rvt. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. 33 Close the Warning dialog. as described below. Defining Circuit Loads | 275 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. “Defining Circuit Loads” on page 275. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes.31 Click to view details of the warning. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.

4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. select panel L-2.Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. and double-click 2-Power. while Phase A provides 4500 VA. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Examination of the loads on Phase A. In the Project Browser. and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase B (4860 VA). B. 276 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and Phase C provides 4140 VA. click Rebalance Loads. click . 2 In the Mechanical/Electrical room.

The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. and for T1. a load of 18844 VA. click . you can use a 30kVA transformer. Defining Circuit Loads | 277 . select the T1 transformer. 9. Therefore. Circuits 2. H-2 is a 100A panel. the distribution is shifted. you may see different values for the loads. 7 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. and 11 feed panel H-2. double-click 1-Power. enter 100A for the Trip value. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. 11 Click OK. the H-2 panel. enter 40A for the Trip value. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. Therefore. 6 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. L-1 and MDP. the values for circuits 1 and 3 are the load presented by the lighting circuits on Level 1 (5664 VA). Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. and circuits 7. 8 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. After the loads are balanced. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 13 In the Type Selector. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 10 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 4. a load of 12780 VA. The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA). and on the Options Bar. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. Had there been a greater imbalance. so no further changes are required.After re-balancing loads. and 6 feed transformer T1. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. 12 In 1-Power view. and the T1 transformer. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel MDP. for panel H-2. select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. click . 5 Select panel H-2.

for transformer T2. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Under Electrical-Loads. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. 1-#12. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. click Disconnect. enter 40A for the Trip value. 25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room.14 In the Error dialog. on the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. double-click 2-Power to make it the active view. on the Options Bar. click (Circuit Properties). and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. Notice that it changes to 3-#3. 15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 26 In the Edit Circuits dialog. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. 18 Click OK. 278 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click the drop-down list on the Options Bar. and select T1 from Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. select panel H-2. 19 With panel L-1 selected. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. . 22 Scroll down. 100. and on the Options Bar. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. under Instance Parameters.00A. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. Verify/adjust wire sizes 16 Right-click panel L-1. 1-#8. 1-#12. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 100A for Rating. 1-#3. 20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. click . select panel L-1. 23 Click OK.

in the Mechanical/Electrical room. click Disconnect. Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. under Instance Parameters. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. Defining Circuit Loads | 279 . 31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. Size the service entrance conductors 35 In the Project Browser. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. select panel L-2. selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. under Electrical Loads.00A. 28 In the 2-Power view. . . 40 You can save the open file if you wish. select the T2 transformer. 37 Close the Warning. and on the Options Bar.27 Click OK. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. 38 On the Options Bar. 32 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click . 34 Click OK. 29 In the Type Selector. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the Error dialog. 36 With the MDP panel selected. select T2. 39 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA.

280 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

By following this workflow. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. At the end of this tutorial. and sanitary piping. go to http://www. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2008. methodology. hot and cold water piping.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 281 .autodesk. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. However. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. you can choose to save your work. As you create the plumbing system. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. you will understand the process.Plumbing Systems 4 In this tutorial. including plumbing fixtures. After finishing each exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. If the tutorial datasets are not present. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building.

Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rvt. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. 3 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click the Training Files icon.rfa M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this lesson.rfa 11 Click Open. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click the Training Files icon. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Loading Plumbing Families.rfa 5 Click Open. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families.Wall Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal.rfa M_Wall Hung Urinal. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The selected component families are loaded into the project. All of the loaded families. “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 6 In the Project Browser. planning is critical to a successful design. are added under Families in the Project Browser. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. 282 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

under Mechanical. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. click Rename. 3 Right-click PVC 2. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. PVC Sanitary Vent. select Tee For Tee. enter PVC Sanitary for the new name. and press Enter. select Tee For Tee. 7 Rename the new pipe type. 8 Right-click PVC Sanitary Vent. select None For Cross. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Configuring Plumbing Pipe Systems.Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. under Mechanical. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 4 Right-click PVC Sanitary. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. select M_Pipe Glued Short Sanitary Tee: Standard For Tap. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. 1 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. select None For Cross. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click PVC. “Add Plumbing Fixtures” on page 284. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 6 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: M_Standard For Transition. right-click PVC Sanitary. and click Properties. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 10 You can save the open file if you wish. and click Duplicate. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: Standard For Transition. select M_Pipe Vent Tee: M_Standard For Tap. and click Properties. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 283 . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.

Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Adding Plumbing Fixtures. click the Training Files icon.Plumbing to make it the active view. Finally. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures.rvt. and double-click 2 . and 3 sinks. 5 On the Options Bar verify that (Place on Work Plane) is selected. 4 Select Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet : Standard in the Type Selector. click Plumbing Fixture. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 3 sinks. ZR (Zoom Region). You then modify the piping. 3 wall-mounted urinals.Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. 284 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this lesson. 3 urinals. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. you add 2 toilets. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping.

click to place the toilet. 7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left. click Plumbing Fixture. (Place on 10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 460 from the right wall. 9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 400 from the right wall. Place wall-mounted urinals 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 285 .6 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. and when the preview of the urinal is 500 from the left wall. click to place the toilet. and on the Options Bar. click to place the toilet. verify that Vertical Face) is selected.

as shown and place a third urinal between the other 2 urinals. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. and click. move the cursor up. 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 14 On the Options Bar. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. verify that References is selected for Pick. 17 Using the same method.) 12 Click Modify. and click to place the dimension annotation. You will use the Dimension tool to space them evenly along the wall. click the centerline of each urinal. 16 Move the cursor down.11 Place a second urinal near the wall of the leftmost toilet stall. and click to place the dimension annotation. 18 Working from left to right. (The placement is not critical. (Aligned) is selected. 286 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and Individual 15 Click the centerline of the left wall.

and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. and click the blue dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. and in the Type Selector. and press Delete. The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall.19 Select the rightmost urinal. select the counter top. 21 While pressing Ctrl. and click OK. select Pick. under Specify a new Work Plane. click the value for the blue dimension. 25 In the drawing area. (Equal Control) above the 20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. select Sink Single Island : Public. Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 287 . select Pick a plane. and for Plane. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. 24 In the Work Plane dialog. Place sinks 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Plumbing Fixture. 26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. and enter 500. 23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane).

29 Click Modify. equalize the space between sinks.27 Place the sink 560 from the left wall and 460 from the lower wall. and then delete the dimension annotations. (The placement is not critical. click Dimension. 31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. 288 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 30 On the Design Bar. and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown. 28 Place a second sink near the right wall. specify the distance between the rightmost sink and the right wall as 560.

and click to place the floor drain.Place the floor drain 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Plumbing Fixture. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 289 . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing to make it the active view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289. 36 You can save the open file if you wish. 33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 35 Click Modify. select Level : Level 2. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Extents. as shown. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. urinals. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and double-click 2 . Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. and in the Type selector. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Starting the Sanitary Piping System. scroll down to View Range. click the Training Files icon. and floor drain. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and for Plane. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. and click View Properties. and click Edit. select M_Round Floor Drain : 125. In this exercise.

16 Right-click in the system browser table. and in the Type Selector. 21 Click Modify. 290 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . specify -1500 for Level Offset. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. click Mechanical Equipment. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 9 In the right panel. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and under View Depth. click Mechanical Settings. The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. specify Fine for Detail Level. specify -1500 for Bottom Offset. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. under Primary Range. NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. Click Window ➤ System Browser. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 5 Click OK twice. click View ➤ Piping. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. you can copy the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects. click Branch.4 In the View Range dialog. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown. and click Main. 19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. specify -300 13 Click OK. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. 6 On the View Control Bar. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Sanitary from the System Type list. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. 18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the chase. specify -300 11 In the left panel. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard.

and click Element Properties. 26 On the Options bar. The urinals. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Options Bar. low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. under Constraints. 24 Zoom in on the men’s room. toilets. enter -1200 for Offset. and floor drain. click (Create Sanitary System). as shown. (Select Equipment for System).The sanitary outlet is added to the Unassigned folder in the system browser. 22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view. click area. The elevation will be specified as -1200. and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 291 .

as needed. 27 On the Options Bar. see Layout Paths. click Modify. Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. 292 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . to view them. as shown. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). 28 Click Solutions. click Layout Path. 31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. For more information on Layout Path solutions.The sanitary outlet is added to Sanitary 1 in the System Browser and the sanitary piping system is previewed in the view. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. and use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals. enter 1.00 for Slope. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. and on the Options Bar. 29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 30 Select solution 1 of 6. and on the Design Bar.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 293 . in line with the branch segment. 33 Click Finish Solution.32 Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. and drag it into the chase.

and orientation of fittings: ■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. as shown. When fittings are reversed. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. 294 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. slope. checking for the proper connectivity. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. The third tab should highlight the entire system. Select each pipe segment in the system. The second tab highlights the fixture. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. and check the slope control. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. ■ ■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation.34 Examine the piping that was automatically placed using the Layout Path tools.

expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 36 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. 37 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 38 Click OK. Enter the keyboard shortcut. 39 On the View Control Bar. and double-click 3D Plumbing. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 295 . click Show categories from all disciplines. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.35 In the Project Browser. VG (Visibility/Graphics). specify Fine for Detail Level.

“Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating the sanitary system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.40 You can save the open file if you wish. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Connecting Sink Drain Lines. click the Training Files icon. 296 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room.rvt.Plumbing to make it the active view. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. and double-click 2 . 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. adding the sinks in the men’s room. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close.

press the Space Bar once. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 297 . click Options.4 Select the tee. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. and click OK. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. If you select the pipe. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 6 In the Layout Options dialog. enter 1. and click Draw Pipe. and when the extension snap displays. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.00 for Slope Angle. click to place the fitting. and on the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify. When you press the space bar. 10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. enter 1000 for Slope Run. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard in the Type Selector. enter 3950. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. 7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. click Pipe Fitting. and press Enter. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. right-click the connector on the open leg.

click to place the fitting. highlight the wye. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 298 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and click OK.00 for Slope Angle. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. right click the connector on the open leg. and on the Options Bar. verify that the slope is specified as 1. 16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector.11 Select the fitting. click to specify the end of the pipe. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and when the wall centerline snap displays. 17 In the Layout Options dialog. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. click Options. click the size for the wye leg. and when the extension snap displays. 15 Select the wye fitting. enter 50. and press Enter. 14 Using the method learned earlier. click Pipe Fitting. and select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard in the Type Selector.

and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 299 . In this case. click to specify the end of the pipe. enter 150 for Offset. the vertical pipe extends 150 above the level of the floor. 21 In the Project Browser. and click Modify. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment.19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. 20 On the Options Bar. click Apply.

press Space.If necessary.00 for Slope Angle. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. and click to place the fitting. 31 Drag the pipe to the right. click to specify the end of the pipe. 32 Click Modify. click Options. and on the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described in the previous exercise. 22 In the 3D view. 29 Click the connector snap on the right leg. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 27 Zoom in on the double wye. This is best done by carefully following these steps. and on the Options Bar. enter 45. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. 26 Select the double wye fitting. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 28 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. 24 On the Plumbing tab. 300 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . The double wye is added to the vertical segment as shown above. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. 30 In the Layout Options dialog. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye : Standard. click Pipe Fitting. click Pipe. and click OK. specify 200 for Offset.

and another segment of pipe. 33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. click Pipe again.This adds a short segment of pipe from the wye. 46 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. 37 Drag the pipe to the left. click Pipe again. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and press Delete. click the connector snap. 38 Click Modify. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. 41 Move the cursor over the center leg of the fitting. and double-click 2 . and click OK. and click Draw Pipe. 40 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 301 . leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. 45 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. and press Delete. 43 Click Modify. and select the leftmost sink. 39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. 34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Plumbing. and click Apply. 44 In the Project Browser. click to specify the end of the pipe. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. specify 400 for Offset.00 for Slope Angle is specified. and on the Options Bar. verify that 45. click Options. 42 On the Options Bar. an elbow. 36 In the Layout Options dialog.

specify 40 mm for Size. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. 49 On the Options Bar.00 for Slope Angle. and on the Options Bar. 48 In the Layout Options dialog. 50 Click Modify.47 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye. and on the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. 51 Select Pipe again. 54 While pressing Ctrl. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click Options. specify 0. 53 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. and click to specify the end of the pipe. 52 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing. drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. and click OK. specify 450 for Offset.

and click Finish to create piping for that solution. You use (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through the up to 6 proposed solutions. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. 63 On the Options Bar. 56 On the Options Bar. click Routing Solutions. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). 60 Using the same method. and select a proposed solution. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 303 . and on the Options Bar. select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 3 of 3. click Routing Solutions. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 55 While pressing Ctrl. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. 58 While pressing Ctrl. Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. 57 Select solution 3 of 3. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. 59 Select solution 2 of 2. 61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink.

00 for Slope. and click Finish. 67 On the Options Bar. click (Edit System). right-click Sanitary 1. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks. 69 One at a time. The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope. 304 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 65 Using the same method. When zoomed in close. and click Select. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. 71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. and click Finish System. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. 66 In the System Browser. When the piping was created for the sink drains. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. Now that the routing is completed. You could have entered a negative value for slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing toward the double wye). The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. you can make minor adjustments to the system. 68 On the Design Bar. M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. and in the Type Selector. select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. modifying offset values. click (Pick Aligning Element) to toggle the reference end for the slope.64 Enter 1. You can move fixtures by dragging. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level. expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard. 72 While pressing Ctrl. click Add to System. such that the arrow is pointing away from the double wye fitting. select all 3 sinks. there is a smaller movement.

highlight the leftmost sink. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. otherwise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.73 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye.) 75 If you want to save your work. and select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard in the Type Selector. 74 Using the method learned earlier. the entire system should be highlighted. 76 You can save the open file if you wish. click File menu ➤ Save As. skip the next 2 steps. (After the third tab. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 305 . 77 Click File menu ➤ Close.

rvt. and click to specify the endpoint for the move as shown. 306 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow. while maintaining the same angle. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Waste Stack Connection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Select the upper elbow. “Refining the Sanitary Stack” on page 306 to continue creating the sanitary system. select it and on the toolbar. and press Delete. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown. click (Move).78 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and select the horizontal pipe. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. 5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. adjusting the sanitary stack. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.

and click to place the fitting. Add a reducing wye to the stack 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 307 . press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). click Pipe Fitting. specify 150 for D (diameter). and on the Options Bar. 10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe.8 Select the elbow and vertical pipe segment. and when the Extension snap displays.

11 Click Modify. The wye is added to the vertical segment.Plumbing. and click piping. double-click 2 . and click Modify. click the value for the 45 degree leg. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. enter 100 to change its size. select the wye. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. click Section. and press Enter. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary 12 Select the wye. 308 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 14 On the View tab on the Design Bar. If necessary.

enter -750 for Offset. 23 Drag the pipe to the left and down. specify Fine. enter 45. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and click OK. and press Enter. parallel to the main segment of pipe from the toilets. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment.Plumbing. click Options. 22 In the Layout Options dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 309 . double-click 3D .00 for Slope Angle. and select the reducing wye fitting. 21 Click the connector on the 45 degree leg. for Detail Level. 18 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.15 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. and when Vertical and Extension displays. and on the Options Bar. 20 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in. 16 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.

27 Select solution 2 of 2. 26 While pressing Ctrl. click Routing Solutions. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 310 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and press Delete. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the wye. and on the Options Bar. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). and click Finish to create piping for that solution. and another segment of pipe.24 Click Modify. an elbow. 25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added.

31 On the Options Bar. specify 1200 for Offset.28 Select the elbow created by the routing solution tool. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 311 . 32 Click Modify. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Pipe. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. 33 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click the connector snap. and click Apply. 29 On the Plumbing tab. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. 30 Move the cursor over the open leg of the reducing wye.

click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Refining the Urinal Lines” on page 312 to continue creating the plumbing system.36 Proceed to the next exercise. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view. (If necessary.) 3 Press Delete. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. click the connector snap. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Urinal Waste Lines. use the Filter tool to select only piping. and double-click 2 . 312 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .rvt. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. running it inside the wall. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. then down to connect with the sanitary main. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal.

click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. 6 On the Options Bar. Refining the Urinal Lines | 313 . specify 1. double-click 3D. click once to specify the end of the pipe. 10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain.Plumbing to make it the active view. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. to a point in line with the center of the leftmost urinal. 11 Click Modify. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. and when the snap displays. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. enter 300 for Offset. drag the preview to the left approximately 200. 12 In the Project Browser. press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar at the bottom of the window. and click to specify the end of the pipe. 8 On the Options Bar. starting at the level of the original pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. specify 50 for D (diameter). 7 In the Layout Options dialog.The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. 9 On the Options Bar. click Draw Pipe. and move the cursor along the center line of the chase. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 300. and click Options. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.00 for Slope Angle.

and click Create Similar. 314 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 17 Click to specify the start of the pipe. Connect the remaining urinals 14 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Modify.Plumbing. 25 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Modify. click Pipe. 22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal. 15 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal. drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.13 Click the new pipe segments and check the slope. 23 Click to specify the start of the pipe.00 for Slope Angle.Plumbing to make it the active view. 16 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe above the middle urinal and the centerline snap for the urinal. double-click 3D. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. verify that the slope is specified as 1. 18 In the Layout Options dialog. double-click 2. and zoom in on the urinals. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. 21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation properties of the existing pipe. and click OK. click Options. and on the Options Bar.

Resize pipes 26 In the Project Browser. specify 80 for D (diameter). In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. 28 On the Options Bar. Add a cleanout 29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal. specify 80 for D (diameter). Refining the Urinal Lines | 315 . 27 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. However. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 100 mm segment) as shown. and on the Options Bar. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. So. double-click 2 .Plumbing to make it the active view.

Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. Redefine fittings 34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. 33 Select the pipe to the urinal again. click Pipe Fitting.Plumbing to make it the active view. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 32 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. 35 In the Project Browser. select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee : Standard. and in the Type Selector. 316 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 36 Select the vertical pipe. select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard. double-click 3D. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard. and on the Options Bar. and when the extension snap displays. 31 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector. click to place the plug on the tee.30 Select the elbow. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. specify 50 for D.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.37 Click Modify. “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing system. 39 You can save the open file if you wish. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. Adding Vents to the System | 317 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 38 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close.

9 Click Apply. If necessary. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. 10 Click Modify. click Pipe. click Options. In the left pane of the Open dialog.00 for Slope Angle. and in the Type Selector. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. specify 0. click Pipe. NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described previously. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. 8 On the Options Bar.rvt. and specify 2700 for Offset. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. Create additional vents 11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. 4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 50 for D (diameter). and click OK. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. 6 On the Options Bar.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 318 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser.

14 Click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Using the same method. specify 50 for D (diameter).12 On the Options Bar. use the Flip control to make the adjustment. 16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. Adding Vents to the System | 319 . specify 2700 for Offset. click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. as shown. and click Apply. place another vent between the two rightmost urinals.

20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe. 27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent. 18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. and click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. 19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent. specify 3000 for Offset. 23 On the Options Bar. and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent to specify the endpoint for the pipe. click Apply. and click to specify the end point. 26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance. 24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross. right click the connector. click Pipe. and click the + control above it to change the elbow to a tee.Connect the individual vents 17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. click Draw Pipe. An elbow is automatically placed at the joint. 25 Select the leftmost vent. 22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe. 21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector. right-click the connector at the open end. and press Space. 320 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . A short section of pipe is added to the tee.

34 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.28 Click Modify. 30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. specify 50 for D (diameter). Add a vent to the sinks 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. and specify 2700 for Offset. click Pipe. click Apply. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. 31 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Vents to the System | 321 . and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. specify 50 for D (diameter). 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.

and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing system. 37 Drag the pipe preview. 38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 322 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Draw Pipe. right-click the connector at the open end. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. 36 Select the vent. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. 39 You can save the open file if you wish.35 Click Modify. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint.

select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. Create the cold water system 14 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 In the table. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Cold Water for the new name. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Main. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. 10 In the left pane. enter Hot Water for the new name. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. 4 Right-click Standard 3. specify M_Pipe Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. and double-click 2 . select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. 5 Right-click Cold Water. specify Tee For Tee. click View ➤ Piping.Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. You now have the cold water piping at 2600 and the hot water piping at 2550. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. expand Piping ➤ Conversion. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. click Mechanical Settings. and click Duplicate. 11 In the left pane. specify M_Pipe Straight Coupling: M_Standard Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify None For Cross. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. which avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. and press Enter. click Rename. click Branch. and press Enter. and in the right pane. and click Properties. specify M_Pipe Elbow : M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Cold Water Piping. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click Standard 2.Plumbing to make it the active view. in the right pane. specify M_Pipe Tee: M_Standard For Tap. right-click Standard. 13 In the left panel. and in the right pane. click Rename. 15 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 9 In the table. click Main. specify M_Pipe Cross: M_Standard For Transition. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. Create the Cold Water System | 323 . click Branch.rvt. click the Training Files icon. 2 Repeat the previous step to create another copy of Standard. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. 16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. in the right pane.

and click OK. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. click (Connect Into). and on the Options Bar. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. 19 While pressing Shift. 29 Click Modify. 31 In the Select Connector dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. select the domestic cold water connector. and click to specify the end the segment. click the floor drain. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. and in the Type Selector. The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 324 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. verify that the slope is specified as 0. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and click OK. then select Plumbing Fixtures. 23 On the Options Bar.17 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System).00 for Slope Angle. 30 Select the middle sink in the view. specify 750 for Offset. click Check None. click Pipe. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Options. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 18 In the Filter dialog. and on the Options Bar click (Filter). 24 In the Layout Options dialog. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. Create piping for the cold water system 21 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. and click to end the run as shown. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.

Create the Cold Water System | 325 . and click to end that segment. click the snap on the cold water pipe. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. select the cold water pipe. 42 On the Options Bar. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. 34 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. (If necessary. specify 600 for Offset. 35 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. 40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall. 36 Click Modify.) 38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. and click Apply. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. 37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe.A segment of pipe is added connecting the sink to the cold water system. drag the preview to the center of the wall behind the sinks. click to specify the end of the pipe. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 33 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the 2 rightmost sinks. 32 On the Plumbing tab. specify 2600 for Offset. 41 Drag the preview to the left. click Pipe. 39 On the Plumbing tab.

and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. 46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). double-click 3D. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.43 Click Modify. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 47 Select the elbow behind the toilet. and click the + control to change it to a tee. 326 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 44 In the Project Browser. click Pipe. 48 On the Plumbing tab.Plumbing. 45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. select the rightmost toilet.

54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. 53 Select the rightmost urinal. Create the Cold Water System | 327 . and on the Options Bar click . and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. and on the Options Bar click that you added to the tee.49 Click the open connector on the tee. 50 Drag the preview to the left. and click the horizontal cold water pipe Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click to specify the endpoint behind the left toilet as shown. 51 Click Modify. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 52 Select the leftmost toilet. . and click the vertical cold water pipe.

drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. 57 On the Options Bar. 58 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. 328 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Adjust cold water pipe sizes 55 On the toolbar. as shown. The final steps in this exercise will adjust the size of several sections of the piping. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut. and then select the horizontal segments as shown.All of the cold water piping is in place. specify 50 for D (diameter). 56 While pressing Shift. F8. feeding the toilets (including the tees.

62 On the Options Bar. 60 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 63 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 64 You can save the open file if you wish. 61 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink).59 On the Options Bar. Create the Cold Water System | 329 . specify 40 for D (diameter). specify 20 for D (diameter).

press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left.rfa. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. 66 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. click Check None. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Double-click M_Water Heater. 2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. and on the Options Bar. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330. click the Training Files icon. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. and zoom in on the sinks. create the hot water system. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. to the left of the main cold water pipe. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Hot Water Piping. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. and click OK. click (Filter). and click to place the water heater as shown.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. select M_Water Heater : 40Gallon. 330 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click the title bar for the browser. click Plumbing Fixture.Plumbing. and in the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. 5 In the Filter dialog. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and click View ➤ Piping. double-click 2 . 6 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Plumbing Fixtures.

expand Domestic Cold Water. select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20.14 In the System Browser. click Add to System. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. 15 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click the main cold water pipe. 20 Select the water heater in the view. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 17 In the System Browser. click Add to System. click (Edit System). 19 On the Edit System tab. click (Edit System). click Draw Pipe. and click Select. right-click the connector. Create the Hot Water System | 331 . and click Select. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. and click Finish System. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. and click Finish System. click (Connect Into). right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. The Edit System tab is activated on the Design Bar. 16 On the Edit System tab. expand Domestic Hot Water. select the water heater in the view. select the water heater in the view.

332 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 25 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. select Pipe Types : Hot Water.23 On the Plumbing tab. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and in the Type Selector. click Pipe. click Pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. and in the Type Selector. specify 800 for Offset. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. specify 2550 for Offset. 28 On the Plumbing tab. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click when the hot water connector displays.

specify 800 for Offset. 33 Click Modify. 36 Right-click the open connector. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. and click to end that segment. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. click Apply. and click to specify the end of the segment. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater.Plumbing. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. and click the hot In this case. (Connect Into). the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system.31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 38 On the Options Bar. 40 In the Project Browser. click Draw Pipe. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 39 Click Modify. 34 Select the middle sink in the view. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. Create the Hot Water System | 333 . and on the Options Bar. double-click 3D. click water pipe below the sinks. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.

44 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 43 Click Modify. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. double-click 2 . press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. 46 You can save the open file if you wish.41 On the Plumbing tab. 334 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 47 Click File menu ➤ Close.Plumbing. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. and click. 42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. click Pipe.

As you create the systems. 335 . methodology. If the tutorial datasets are not present.autodesk. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. By following the recommended workflow. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. However. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2008. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. At the end of this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work.Fire Protection Systems 5 In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you design a wet and dry fire protection system for an office building. you will understand the process. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise.

You create views and pipe types. and size and tag the pipes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. 7 Using the method that you just learned. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Fire Prot view active. 6 Click OK.Ceiling Mech view. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. A new view called Copy of 2 .Mech. Notice that the 2 Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. you create views and pipe types. do the following: ■ ■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time. Create new views 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that discipline and makes system design more efficient. right-click in the drawing area. click the Training Files icon. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans.Fire Prot for Name. and click OK. right-click the view named 2 . and create a new ceiling plan view based on the 2 . Next. and finally. do the following: ■ ■ For Discipline. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. naming it 1 . This view is based on the 2 Mech view properties. insert fittings. In this lesson. create schedules. ■ 336 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. and create a new 3D view based on the 3D HVAC view. enter Fire Protection.Ceiling Fire Prot.Mech is created and becomes the active view. You will also draw the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. right-click Copy of 2 . Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project. under Graphics. you modify the view properties. you can then select that discipline or sub-discipline from the list. verify that Mechanical is selected. and click View Properties. During the fire protection design process. manually modify the pipes and fittings. Then. For Sub-Discipline. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. naming it 3D Fire Prot.Fire Prot. 4 With the 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms.Designing Fire Protection Systems Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. naming it 2 . and click Rename.Mech. 3 Enter 2 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.

Next. Create new pipe types 9 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. for Material. 18 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 22 For System Type. select Main. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. you modify the pipe type properties. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.Remember to specify Fire Protection for sub-discipline so that all views will be listed under Fire Protection in the Project Browser. including the new material property. or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. under Mechanical. you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. 23 Under System Type. you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Selector. enter Fire Protection Wet. right-click the Design Bar. click Modify. Next. 17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 337 . click Mechanical Settings. Next. and click OK. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the Project Browser. and click OK. the command in progress terminates. click Pipe. select Carbon Steel. Next. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click (Properties). right-click a pipe type and use the context menu. NOTE You can also create. 14 For Name. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. select Fire Protection Wet. double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those views in this lesson. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. Configure pipe conversion settings 20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. TIP When you click Modify. modify. You can also press Esc. 19 On the Design Bar. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. 16 With the Type Properties dialog open. click Duplicate. and click Fire Protection. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings.

Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active. For more information. double-click the 1 . and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building). refer to Help. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views that you will be designing in. The room name and number display in a tooltip and on the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar). verify that 2750 is specified. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. 25 For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Fire Protection Wet. So.■ For Offset. structural beams. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 24 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. 26 Under System Type. or architecture. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. verify that 2750 is selected. TIP If a view does not contain room tags. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. However. NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 338 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 27 Click OK. you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views.Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active. duct. Next. Draw the supply pipe 28 In the Project Browser. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 29 Enter ZR. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For Offset. select Branch. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.

click (Thin Lines) to display the geometry in thin lines.30 On the View toolbar. The new pipe displays. and click Apply to specify the pipe end point. enter 0. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 339 . select 150 mm. if you reopen Revit MEP. You will need to reactivate it. and click in the approximate area to specify the pipe start point. This line thickness is used for plotting purposes giving the effect of line weights. 35 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. 34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. Thin Lines allows you to view the true thickness of lines relative to the zoom of the view. do the following: ■ ■ For D. enter 6400. NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session. NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value. for Offset. 31 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Type Selector.

Next. For example. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the rooms. IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise. and press Tab. 41 In the Save As dialog. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. you do not need to type measurement symbols. select Fine for Detail Level. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. using this information. 36 In the Project Browser. you place the sprinklers. and Shading w/ Edges for Model Graphics Style. Notice that the supply pipe extends from the floor in level 1 into level 2. navigate to the folder of your choice. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600 mm. use the Zoom. First. and Spin buttons to verify that the supply pipe geometry is as you expected. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line and shaded allowing you to better see it. you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. just enter the value. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the next exercise. 40 If you want to save your work. click File menu ➤ Save. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. 340 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you created new views and modified view properties. Finally. 39 In the Dynamic View dialog. 38 On the View toolbar. you can choose to save your work. you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule. click (Dynamically Modify View). you verify the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Then. double-click the 3D Fire Prot view. and click Save. 37 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left of the drawing area). The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. As you place the sprinklers.TIP When entering a value. you create a schedule to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. enter Starting the Fire Protection Project Training for File name. In this exercise. Scroll.

1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. For Type. enter Min. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 5 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Verify that Formula is selected. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 6 Select a field. Sprinklers. click the Training Files icon. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. verify that Common is selected. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 341 . To remove a field. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per room. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Click OK. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Area. verify that Number is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Rooms. click Schedule/Quantities. Open the m Placing Sprinklers. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 8 In the Calculated Value dialog.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.1. under Available fields. and click Remove. do the following: ■ Under Category. select it. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 12. and click Add. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. 4 While pressing Ctrl.1 square meters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Formula. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. enter Area/12. Create a calculated value parameter 7 Click Calculated Value. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. For Discipline.

Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building).NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. select Number. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. including spaces. select Min. You can change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. For Field formatting. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. select 2 decimal places. 13 In the Format dialog. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. Verify that equals is selected. A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms. Under Level. Place a sprinkler 14 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. Sprinklers. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place. Next. 15 Enter ZR. verify that (none) is selected. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. click Field Format. The Min. select Fixed. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. select Level. For Units. Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. For Then by. verify that (none) is selected. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. 11 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 342 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and double-click 2. Click OK twice. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For And. Organize the data 10 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. sorted according to room number. For Rounding.

verify that Lines is selected. For Plane. and specify Level : Level 2. click to specify the line end point. Verify that Chain and Radius are cleared.Next. 19 On the Options Bar. 18 Click OK. 16 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. verify that Level : Level 2 is selected. ■ Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 343 . 20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown. This specifies Level 2 as the work plane for the reference lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In the Type Selector. click Lines. and after the intersection snap displays. you draw 2 reference lines to help you accurately place the sprinklers in the center of the ceiling tiles. click to specify the line start point. and after the intersection snap displays. 21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Name. 17 In the Work Plane dialog.

under Graphics. 25 Using the same method. You need to specify an underlay for this view to display the reference lines. and click View Properties. Notice that the Lines tool remains active. select Level 2.The line is created. draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling tile. The line displays. 24 Click OK. 344 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . a warning displays indicating that the line is not visible in the ceiling plan view. 22 With the Lines tool active. However. for Underlay. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click in the drawing area.

click Sprinkler. select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 345 . 27 Zoom in on the lines to verify them. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.26 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Line tool. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. and after the mid point snap displays. 31 With the view zoomed. place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines. Next. click to place the sprinkler. 28 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you place a sprinkler.

The underlay was used only to display the reference lines. 34 Right-click in the drawing area. This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. 33 While pressing CTRL. you delete the reference lines. you delete the reference lines. Next. for Underlay. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles. The sprinkler is centered in the ceiling tile. Next. under Graphics. 346 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. and click View Properties.32 Click Modify on the Design Bar. you continue placing sprinklers. and then press Delete. Next. 37 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy). and click OK. NOTE When placing sprinklers. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click both reference lines. You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers 36 In the drawing area. The selected sprinkler displays in red. select the sprinkler that you placed. select None.

40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 347 . 39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible. and after the intersection snap displays. A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point. and that Copy is selected. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. 41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open.Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. click to specify the copy start point. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor. 38 On the Options Bar.

Copy and array sprinklers 42 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. Next. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 7. verify that Copy is selected. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and select Multiple. 348 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 45 On the Edit toolbar. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). click (Copy). click to specify the copy start point. 47 In Office 6. and after the intersection snap displays. 43 Enter ZR. and sketch a zoom region around Office 7 (located immediately below Office 6). 46 On the Options Bar. 44 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 6.TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering.

and after the intersection snap displays.48 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 7. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 349 . specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.

and after the intersection snap displays. specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. 350 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .49 Move the cursor directly down.

The sprinklers are placed. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. 53 On the Options Bar. it is an ideal situation to use an array. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. select Last. Verify that Constrain is cleared. to specify array end point. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. 51 While pressing CTRL. because all of the sprinklers in Office 7 are equally spaced. Furthermore. 52 On the Edit toolbar. you array the other Office 7 sprinklers. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7. You first specify an array start point. creating an array is a 2-step process. For Move To. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. click Modify. click (Array). TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 351 . A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. 50 On the Design Bar. Next.

54 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 7 sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the array end point as shown. Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. and after the intersection snap displays. 55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. click to specify the array start point. 352 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

The Office 7 sprinklers are placed. Next. you place sprinklers in Office 8. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 353 . 56 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.

57 Starting outside the upper-left corner of the building. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. 59 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. select Sprinklers.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. Notice that all elements in the 2 . 354 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . drag the cursor to the lower-right. and click OK. 58 On the Options Bar. and draw a pick box around Office 6.

62 Using the mouse scroll wheel. IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right). and after the mid point snap displays. or by selecting individual components. 61 On the Options Bar. you are selecting all components that are visible in the active view (within the view range). clear Multiple. you can clear it by filtering. 63 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. click to specify the copy start point. or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 355 . Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. adjust the view so that you can see both Office 6 and Office 8.The Office 6 sprinklers are selected. If the selection contains an unwanted component. by cross-picking (drag right to left). 60 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy).

enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. and after the mid point snap displays.64 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 8. 356 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the copy end point. NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap.

Next. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area. 70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown. 66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler.You have now placed the sprinklers for the 3 offices. Remember to watch for the intersection snap. click to specify the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection. 67 On the Edit toolbar. you place sprinklers in the large common space. Open 2. 69 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays. Open 2. verify that Multiple is cleared. click (Copy). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 357 . 68 On the Options Bar. You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array.

74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. 358 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . select 2nd. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2. For Move To. You could copy sprinklers. enter 6 for the number of arrays. Next. 71 Select the sprinkler that you copied. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 73 On the Options Bar. but creating an array is quicker. click (Array).The Office 8 sprinkler is copied to Open 2. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 72 On the Edit toolbar. For Number. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.

refer to Help. The array is created. you create multiple arrays based on this array. If you make a mistake placing the array. select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler. 76 While pressing CTRL. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point.75 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. Next. and after the intersection snap displays. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 359 . For more information about arrays. This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar. Zoom out to display the array. This indicated that the specified end point would be the placement location for the second array. click to specify the array end point as shown. undo the step and try again. IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately.

and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify end point for the second array. For Move To. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 78 On the Options Bar. For Number. 360 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .If you need to remove an object from a selection. enter 4 for number of arrays. 77 On the Edit toolbar. verify that 2nd is selected. 79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler that is within the array selection. select the object to remove while pressing SHIFT. 80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Verify that Constrain is cleared. click (Array).

To modify a family type. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. Because this room does not have a ceiling. you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Load a new sprinkler family 82 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. you will use non-hosted sprinklers. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 361 . click Edit Family on the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. The sprinkler family loads into the project. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete Next. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor.The arrays are created. However. first. 81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog. 83 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to load them in the project.rfa file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder. 84 Open the M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted.

Fire Prot to make it the active view. select both sprinklers. Next. double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 93 On the Options Bar. You can also right-click. 362 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click Sprinkler. You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room. enter 2900 mm. and while pressing CTRL. 87 In the Type Selector. and double-click 2 . and notice that the sprinklers display in the Mechanical/Electrical room. and click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the left wall. You address this warning after placing the other sprinkler. click (Properties). and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall. This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers. This occurred because the sprinkler offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. enter ZR. 95 In the Project Browser. 94 In the Element Properties dialog. 86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall. 91 In the Project Browser.Place non-hosted sprinklers 85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active. you change the sprinkler offsets. and click OK. under Constraints. Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display.Ceiling Fire Prot. 88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room. move the cursor toward the right wall. A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. for Offset. select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). 92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room. 89 Move the cursor near the left wall. and using the listening dimensions for reference. click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall. and click Element Properties from the context menu.

snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. Remember to always round decimals up to the next whole number. you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. 97 If you want to save your work. Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms. navigate to the folder of your choice.Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 96 Using the placement methods that you have learned. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. enter Placing Sprinklers Training for File name. 98 In the Save As dialog. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. and click Save. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 363 . Remember to click to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.

You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. a Default system category would not contain any system components. During this exercise. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. it would be considered empty. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. and use the System Browser to confirm your systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). If the System Browser does not respond. In the next exercise. click in the drawing area to make it active. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Open the m Connecting Sprinklers. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. after you placed the sprinklers. you also convert and place pipe fittings. 1 In the Project Browser. All system components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. if all system components are assigned. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. However. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system category located in the Unassigned folder. After creating the logical connection. and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you create a system and piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. modify pipe branches. So. then press F9. 364 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.Fire Prot to make it the active view. click System Browser. Empty Default system categories do not display in the System Browser. sprinklers. and double-click 2 . click the Training Files icon. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and physically with piping. Thus. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components (piping is not considered a system). piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project.

6 On the Options Bar.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 8 and Office 28. 7 In the Filter box. Connecting the Sprinklers | 365 . You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. click Check None. Notice that all elements within the 2 . select Sprinklers. and click OK. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes.

366 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red.All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected and display in red. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you have assigned them to a system. Notice that after you click . IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. Note that this display indicates that the new system is selected. and will be considered empty. After you assign the remaining sprinklers. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. the default system category will not contain any sprinklers. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

Remember that systems can be created before or after creating pipe is drawn. Connect the sprinklers with piping 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. and click Select to select the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 14 On the Options Bar. ■ You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You want the Network layout solution because it connects the sprinklers to a central main. After placing a system component. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. Click (Next Solution). verify that Solutions is selected. Connecting the Sprinklers | 367 . right-click Fire Protection Wet. and click Select. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. you can a system component to access the Layout Path on the Options Bar. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. and select solution 2. 13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The main will connect to the supply pipe in the stairwell. press Tab. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and select the system. expand Piping. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar. Next. This listing represent the system that you just created.Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser.

18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2.Next. 20 Click OK. You use pipe conversion settings to convert the layout path to physical piping. or architecture. 368 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . verify that Main is selected. click Settings. You now modify the vertical main layout that will be the main pipe. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. 17 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet.0 is specified. Modify the layout path 21 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. you modify the layout path. duct. verify that 2750. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Next. For Offset. 19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 15 On the Options Bar. 22 Zoom in on the vertical main. 23 Select the vertical layout path segment. A drag control displays. select Branch. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.

click Finish Layout. drag the main to the left as shown.24 Using the drag control. 25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 369 .

Modify the pipe runs 26 In the Project Browser. This is because they constitute a physical rather than a logical connection. You hide these elements to allow you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe. Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. select a different layout solution. 370 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views.The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components. Next. and the system remains. and are not part of the system. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Always check pipe connectivity after modification. Notice that all of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings. 27 Enter VG.

and after it highlights. 30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler. Under Visibility. Floors. and Windows. and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler. The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red. enter ZR. clear Casework. 29 Click OK. Walls. Lines. and click to select them. Ceilings. Railings. do the following: ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines.28 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. 31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected. Doors. press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler. The building elements are hidden. Stairs. Roofs. Connecting the Sprinklers | 371 . Rooms.

33 Press Delete to delete the selected elements.32 While pressing SHIFT. and draw a zoom region around the Open 2 sprinkler (located to the lower-right of the Office 8 sprinkler. 372 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted. 34 Enter ZF. 35 Enter ZR. The Office 8 sprinkler is shown circled). the logical (system) connection is still intact. select the sprinkler to remove it from the selection. to zoom out the view to fit the window.

These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation. These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. Notice that 2 plus signs display. You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. Connecting the Sprinklers | 373 .Next. 37 Click the plus sign on the right. you convert the elbow fitting at the end of the branch in order to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to it. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. Convert a fitting 36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler.

A minus sign displays. 38 Select the tee fitting. This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. 374 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation.

TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. and click the left plus sign. 39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting. 40 Select the elbow fitting. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. Connecting the Sprinklers | 375 .

43 Using the mouse scroll wheel. Next. use the connector snap. such as pipe fittings and equipment in a 3D view. . Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. use the end point snap. . 44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward the Office 8 sprinkler. pipe fittings. When connecting pipe to some elements. click to specify the pipe start point. to quickly and accurately locate a connector. you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch. zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible. and after the end point snap displays. click Pipe. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. or equipments. 42 Place the cursor over the open end of the tee fitting. 376 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . if a connector snap does not display. NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe. Connect the Office 8 sprinkler 41 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. When drawing pipe. If you pause briefly.

This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height. 46 In the Type Selector. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing pipe. 47 Continue to draw the pipe. Connecting the Sprinklers | 377 . If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. enter 300 and press Enter to specify the length of the pipe segment. and the offset parameter to match those of the selected connector. press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing pipe. You should always verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar. and as the listening dimensions display. TIP When drawing pipe.45 Press the Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and offset values to those of the tee fitting. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected.

and after the pipe segment highlights. Next. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added. press Tab 3 times. Check connectivity and validate geometry 51 In the 3D view. and select the pipe segment that you just drew. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate the pipe geometry. 49 Select the Office 8 sprinkler. 48 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 378 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified. 50 On the Options Bar. click (Connect Into).The pipe segment is created.

you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view. you validate the piping geometry. and after the objects highlight. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. press TAB the required number of times. If the entire network does not highlight. fittings. allowing you to better see the connections. and verify that the physical pipe geometry is as expected. Next. and equipment. then you know that a disconnect exists. indicating that they are physically connected. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted objects. or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. Connecting the Sprinklers | 379 .The pipe branch including the sprinklers and the pipe fittings highlight. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. When pipes and fittings are connected. Typically a disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make a connection. The first time you press Tab. The lower section of the pipe run displays in red. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. 53 In the 3D Fire Prot view. click to select them. After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight. zoom in on the pipe and fittings. you can click to select them. 52 Using the same method.

This clears the Office 28 sprinkler from the selection. clear Sprinklers. 58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run. and after it highlights. and click OK. right-click. under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 57 In the Filter dialog. 56 On the Options Bar. double-click 2 .Continue pipe branch modification 54 In the Project Browser. 380 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and click Delete. 55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings and sprinkler) that services Office 28. click .Fire Prot to make it the active view. The pipe branch and fittings are deleted.

and click OK. and after it highlights. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch.59 Place the cursor over the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. clear Sprinklers. 64 In the Filter dialog. 62 While pressing CTRL. click . 61 With the branch selected. Connecting the Sprinklers | 381 . 60 Click to select the branch. place the cursor over the lower-left Office 29 sprinkler. and after it highlights. including the pipe fittings and lower Office 29 sprinklers. Both selected branches display in red. 63 On the Options Bar. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. including the pipe fittings and the upper 2 Office 29 sprinklers. select the highlighted pipe branch.

382 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Next. clear Sprinklers. 69 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. 68 In the Filter dialog. click . Next. 66 Draw a pick box around the 2 upper-right sprinklers in Open 2. you draw pipe to connect a sprinkler.This clears the Office 29 sprinklers from the selection. you need to delete the pipes connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers. 67 On the Options Bar. Notice that only the pipes and pipe fittings are selected. 65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings. and click OK.

and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler. click to specify the first pipe segment end point. 75 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. click to connect to the sprinkler. and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler. Connecting the Sprinklers | 383 . 74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler. 71 Right-click the connector located on the right end of the pipe.70 In Open 2. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector. select the upper-right pipe branch to display the pipe segment connector. All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector. and click Draw Pipe. and after the centerline snap displays. 73 Zoom the view. 72 In the Type Selector.

you check connectivity. 76 Select the lower Office 28 sprinkler (located above Office 29). connect the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. 79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch. The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added. The Office 28 and Office 29 sprinklers are connected to the branch. 77 On the Options Bar. you connect 2 more office sprinklers to the branch. Next.The upper-right Office 29 sprinkler is connected. and select the pipe segment that you just drew. Next. 78 Using the same method. and press TAB twice. click (Connect Into). 384 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

and after it highlights. Connecting the Sprinklers | 385 . 82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned. This indicates that the branch and office sprinklers are connected. you make additional pipe modifications. 80 Use to connect each of the Open 2 sprinklers to the branch.The entire pipe branch highlights. Next. press TAB twice. including sprinklers and pipe fittings. The branch including the Open 2 and office sprinklers highlight indicating that they are physically connected. notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight. Modify the pipe main 83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers. connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers to the pipe branch located on the left. You need to connect these sprinklers. These sprinklers are not physically connected. However. and then click to select the highlighted objects. Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe. 81 Check connectivity.

TIP After using TAB to check connectivity. release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments. 84 Enter ZR. the connection continues to display for easy reference. and draw a zoom region around both disconnects. This indicates 2 disconnects. 85 Select the upper pipe segment to display the 2 pipe connectors. Notice that the highlighting stops at 2 areas along the main pipe. If you move the cursor. branch. 86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment.The connected main. and sprinklers display in red. 386 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The highlighted objects display in red. You need to resolve the disconnects. making them easier to view. These branches were deleted during branch consolidation. These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main. and after the connector snap displays. you can click to select all highlighted objects.

88 On the Options Bar.TIP When dragging a pipe connector. select the object as the trim/extend start point. then select the object as the trim/extend end point. click (Trim/Extend). 87 Zoom in on the lower disconnect. You can also enter TR to activate the Trim/Extend tool. you use the Trim tool to resolve the disconnect. Instead of dragging the pipe connector. or in resolving disconnects. NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. As always. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct. use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that the Trim/Extend tool is active. Connecting the Sprinklers | 387 . 90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point. First. notice that cursor changes to a pencil indicating that the Draw tool is active. 89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point.

The main and branches highlight. 91 Click Modify on the Design Bar.The 2 pipe segments connect. you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run. 92 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Next. 93 Check connectivity. 388 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . indicating that they are connected.

Fire Prot to make it the active view. you tile 2 views to work in them simultaneously. TIP When you tile 2 views.Fire Prot view active. Note that if this option is unavailable. 96 In the Project Browser. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. Next. 95 With the 2 . including the sprinkler to the right. You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view. the active view is tiled to the left. and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of the main. 98 Enter WT to tile both windows. 97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. 99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown. Connecting the Sprinklers | 389 . enter ZR.Work in 2 views simultaneously 94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse or medium (single line) Detail Level. the active view is the only open window.

100 In the 2 . 105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting. Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls. Changing the Detail Level to Fine (2 line) will display the fittings in their actual size.NOTE When you are viewing pipes in single line display (coarse or medium Detail Level). you change the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line. select the elbow. it is important to remember that the fitting connectors are located in the actual location of the fitting and not in the end of the symbolic representation. 102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you can change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe or turn off component visibility or filter objects in the Visibility Graphics dialog.Fire Prot view. 104 Zoom in on the tee. and after the mid point snap displays. select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. all pipe fittings display in their symbolic form. 103 In the Type Selector. convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation. You should always zoom in on the fitting when working with a fitting. This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. you place an endcap on the tee. 390 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. click Pipe Fitting. click to place the endcap. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line. When snapping to fittings in single line Detail Level. especially when symbolic fittings are displayed. select Fine for Detail Level. 101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area. Next. This symbolic representation is exaggerated and is larger than the actual fitting size. and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier. First.

107 Place the cursor over the endcap. validate the endcap geometry. and after it highlights. Connecting the Sprinklers | 391 . The endcap and tee fittings highlight indicating that they are connected. press TAB once. 108 In the 3D Fire Prot view.106 Click Modify on the Design Bar.

Notice that the endcap displays as centered in the tee fitting. 114 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. 112 On the Options Bar. and pipe fittings display in red. The sprinkler. this tee fitting endcap is connected to the tee connector. 111 In the 3D Fire Prot view. all fittings and other elements are represented in their symbolic form. click . their connectors are located in their actual location. 113 In the Filter dialog. 110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap. You can also select the sprinkler while pressing SHIFT to clear it from the selection. and click OK. draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch.Fire Prot view. 392 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . pipe. Next. clear Sprinklers. However. you modify the sprinkler branch connection. The pipes and fittings display in single line. As stated earlier in this exercise. So. in single line display. use the View Control Bar to change the view detail level to Medium.109 In the 2 .

115 Select the sprinkler. 117 In the 2 . You need to resolve the disconnect. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler. and after the connector snap displays. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. Connecting the Sprinklers | 393 . 116 On the Options Bar. release the mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch. click .Fire Prot view. zoom in and select the left pipe segment. 118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right.

120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32. You will check connectivity later in this exercise. notice that the wet pipe segment is located over this room. Next. You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice. However. and press Delete. zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to the left of Conference Room 31). You resolved the disconnect. Watch for the end point snap as you drag the pipe segment. The dry fire protection system will service the server room. 394 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .Note that the end of the right pipe segment (and its connector) might be located in the symbolic fitting.Fire Prot view. You can also snap to the end point of the tee fitting to connect the pipe. You can validate the geometry in the 3D view. Remove a pipe segment 119 In the 2 . you remove the pipe above Server Room 32.

and check connectivity. and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified. Connecting the Sprinklers | 395 . 122 Using the conversion methods that you learned. Next. This closes the left pipe segment end. 123 Zoom out. Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control. convert the tee to an elbow. You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower section of the wet system pipe run. you need to convert a sprinkler tee fitting to an elbow in order to close the pipe connection. 121 Enter ZR.You will reconnect the Conference Room 31 sprinklers when you later finish this pipe run.

validate the pipe geometry. you connect the lower conference room sprinklers.Notice that the lower conference room sprinklers are not connected. 396 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 124 In the 3D view. finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31 (located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown. You connect these after you validate the pipe geometry. Finish modifying the lower section of the pipe run 125 Using the methods that you learned. Next.

select a pipe segment. system equipment. close the 3D Fire Prot view. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. 128 In the 2 . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. check connectivity. and then you create piping to physically connect them. 126 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and pipe or duct is created. Connecting the Sprinklers | 397 . verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. and number of elements in the system. boilers. and maximize the 2 . For System Equipment. mechanical equipment. Next. or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system.Fire Prot view. you can select the pipe or duct. and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. such as VAV boxes. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). radiators. air terminals. 131 On the Options Bar. and AC units. 129 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. click Add To System. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). For Number of Elements. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For System Name. Connect the upper section of the level 2 wet system 127 If the windows are tiled.Fire Prot view. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. Select Multiple. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. verify that 30 is specified. verify that None is specified. fitting. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar.Remember to resolve disconnects.

133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. 398 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar now reports that there are 66 Number of Elements (sprinklers) in the system. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out).This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. 135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. click Finish System. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. click Finish. You cannot select them. The selected sprinklers display in red. 132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building. 134 On the Options Bar.

you confirm the system in the System Browser. click System Browser. expand Piping. 137 With the cursor over the sprinkler. right-click Fire Protection Wet. Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system. 140 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler.Confirm the level 2 wet system 136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view. 139 Under Systems. press TAB twice to confirm the entire system. Next. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed to a system. Connecting the Sprinklers | 399 . and click Select. and press TAB once to confirm the upper half of the system. 138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Also notice that the Unassigned folder is not listed. Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section. and click Expand All.

select any system component to access Layout Path on the Options Bar. Next. TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. and select a newly added sprinkler. After placing system components. ■ 400 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Click .The logical connection displays in red confirming the level 2 wet system. Create piping for upper section of the wet system 141 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 142 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. not piping which is the physical connection. verify that Solutions is selected. 144 On the Options Bar. and select solution 5. The Layout Path tool activates. you are confirming the logical connection between system elements. NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems. The newly added sprinklers are logically connected. you physically connect these sprinklers with piping. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

you verify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run. verify that 2750.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Settings.0 is specified. Next. 145 On the Options Bar. verify that Main is selected. Connecting the Sprinklers | 401 . This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. 148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 150 Click OK. select Branch. You now verify the conversion settings that you specified in an earlier exercise. click Finish Layout. Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. 146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Offset. as there is a vertical main and horizontal branches. 151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. The selected solution is consistent with the design of the existing pipe run. 149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main.

402 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Next. If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run. you complete the pipe run.The fire protection pipe geometry (main and branches) is created. Complete the level 2 wet system pipe run 152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run. and validate the geometry. Use M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. This pipe run physically connects the upper wet system sprinklers to the lower wet system sprinklers at the cross fitting. modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ ■ Use Pipe Type : Fire Protection Wet. check connectivity. and place an endcap on the cross fitting at the top end of the main. this is because the pipe run (most likely the main) is disconnected. You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the branches. Remember to resolve disconnects.

3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 33. As with the wet system. navigate to the folder of your choice. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Place sprinklers 2 Enter ZR. and click Save. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 32. click (Copy). you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In the next exercise. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name. Finally. you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in line with the specifications. Connectivity was checked.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 2 . The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. After creating the system. 154 In the Save As dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Open the m Creating the Dry System. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. The pipes in this system do not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32. and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. In this exercise. 4 On the Edit toolbar. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. click File menu ➤ Save. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 403 . you create the dry fire protection system. 153 If you want to save your work.You have completed the level 2 fire protection wet system. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. You also converted pipe fittings and placed endcap fittings.

click to specify the copy start point.5 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection snap displays. Verify that Copy is selected. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. 7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. 8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left. 404 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. Next. select M_Sprinkler-Dry_Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Dry Pendent. 14 In the drawing area. Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed. while pressing CTRL. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 405 . You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). select both sprinklers. click System Browser. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering.9 Click Modify. 10 While pressing CTRL. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. select both Server Room 32 sprinklers. you change the sprinkler type. The System Browser opens. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Next. 11 In the Type Selector. you create the dry system to logically connect the 2 sprinklers. Create the dry system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 13 Under Systems.

click Options. double-click 2 . 17 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. 22 In the Type Selector. the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. you can view system information including flow. and click OK. (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign Notice that after you click .Fire Prot to make it the active view. For Offset. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. In the System Browser. 25 In the Layout Options dialog. and click Select. 20 Zoom in on Server Room 32. and so on. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. 26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system. Next. 18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1. right-click. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered empty. The sprinklers are logically connected. for Slope Angle. Create the dry system pipe run 19 In the Project Browser. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). click the sprinklers to it. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.15. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Dry in the Piping folder. Each selected sprinkler displays in red. verify that 2750.15 On the Options Bar. you create the pipe run to physically connect the sprinklers. click Pipe. 24 On the Options Bar. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. and for each sprinkler. and click Select The selected system displays in red. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. 21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. sprinkler size. Next. 406 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. enter 0. verify that 15mm is selected. You have confirmed and validated the system. Confirm and validate the system 16 In the System Browser.0 is specified. and after the intersection snap displays. This indicates that you have assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red.

Next. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 407 . You can confirm this in the 3D Fire Prot view or by checking connectivity. and connect to the lower sprinkler as shown. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. click . 29 Select the unconnected Server Room 32 sprinkler. 28 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. 30 On the Options Bar. Watch for the centerline and connector snaps. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe.27 Draw the pipe run to the right. Notice that the pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper Server Room 32 sprinkler.

expand 3D views. 38 On the Options Bar. 33 Zoom in on Server Room 32. click (Create Similar). and all pipe fittings are automatically added. indicating that they are connected. 408 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. under Fire Protection. you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry. 36 Select the vertical main pipe. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 32 In the Project Browser. 37 On the Edit toolbar. 34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. To follow good design practice.The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and double-click 3D Fire Prot. You can click the slope control to change the slope direction. Next. and press TAB 3 times. click Options. 31 Zoom the view. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. Next. Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. 35 Zoom in on the pipe to validate that the pipe geometry is as expected. you connect the fire protection system pipe run to the supply pipe.

you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters. This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. First. draw the pipe to the left and connect it to the main as shown. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 409 . This clears the slope. 43 In the Save As dialog. However. 42 Check connectivity. and click Add to add the field to the list. 41 Using the methods that you learned when consolidating branches. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you placed dry system sprinklers. and in the 3D view validate the pipe geometry. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. 40 Zoom in on the supply pipe located in Stairwell 30. the pipe type and other properties match the vertical main that you selected. always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. After the system was completed. 4 Under Available fields. and click Save. select Family and Type. or by right-clicking a connector. if you use the Create Similar tool. checked pipe connectivity. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. select Sprinklers. navigate to the folder of your choice. you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the fire protection system. enter 0. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Additionally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that you did not need to verify the pipe type because Create Similar matches the connector parameters and the type of the selected object. and click OK. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. and click Add. In this exercise. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. . click Schedule/Quantities. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. do the following: ■ Under Category. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. under Available fields. select Count.39 In the Layout Options dialog. for Slope Angle. Then. Click OK. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. In this case. enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name. You have completed the dry fire protection system.

and that it is sorted according to family and type. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. the active view is tiled to the left.Fire Prot to make the view active. For Then by. You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you modify the pipe diameters. you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active. verify that (none) is selected. Next. 8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 10 Enter WT to tile both windows. Click OK twice.If you need to remove a field from the list. Select Grand totals. 410 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . TIP When you tile 2 views. Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays. and click Remove. There is a grand total of 68 sprinklers on level 2. A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. 5 Select a field. 9 In the Project Browser. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Family and Type. Next. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. select it. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. and double-click 2. Tile the views 7 In the Project Browser. Verify that Ascending is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. and clear Itemize every instance. you tile the floor plan and 3D views. 11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ Count Family and Type Next. Organize the data 6 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Note that this option is not available if the active view is the only open window.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 411 . Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 12 In the 2. select the supply pipe in the stairwell to remove it from the selection. click .NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter.Fire Prot view. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection pipe run. Changing the diameter. width. 14 In the Filter dialog. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. or width. height. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. and while pressing SHIFT. or height. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. 15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. and click OK. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. 13 On the Options Bar. click Check None. width.

draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. and the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for these pipes. you modify the diameter the main. 18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. and press TAB twice. 412 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The entire fire protection pipe run highlights.16 On the Options Bar. Next. 17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar. Modify the diameter of the main 19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. You changed the diameter for the pipe run because the majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. select 25mm. verifying that it is connected. For D: (diameter). All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 25mm diameter except for the supply pipe.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 413 . If branch segments are selected. while pressing CTRL. 20 With the main selected. the pipe fittings.NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. The selected main pipe displays in red. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. and the supply pipe. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection.

414 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and on the Options Bar. 24 In the 3D view. verify that the diameter is 150mm. 21 Click in a blank space in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. 25 Validate the pipe run geometry. select 100mm. The diameter of the fire protection main changes. so you need to exclude the supply pipe. 23 On the Options Bar. select the supply pipe to remove it from the selection. especially around the pipe fittings.You want to maintain the original supply pipe diameter. select the supply pipe. while pressing SHIFT. for D:. 22 In the 3D view.

27 Enter ZR. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 rooms in the building. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 415 .Fire Prot view to make it active.Modify the diameter of branch pipes 26 Click in the 2 . You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the code requirements. 28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main.

Next. 36 On the Options Bar. Next. 29 On the Options Bar. You can verify this selection in the 3D view. 31 On the Options Bar. This segment services 5 sprinklers. zoom in on the branch that you modified. The pipe diameter is modified. 37 In the Tag dialog. you continue to modify the pipe branch. and 2 in the open space). 416 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Clear Leader.Fire Prot view. 39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. and after the segment highlights.This pipe segment services 6 sprinklers (4 in the office and conference room. 32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler. The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. Later in this exercise. you tag some of the pipes enabling you to identify their diameters. for D:. The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. The specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment. click Tag ➤ By Category. Click Tags. for D:. for D:. you will complete the branch diameter modification. Tag the pipes 34 In the 2 . verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings. under Category. 33 On the Options Bar. click to place the tag. 38 Click OK. for Pipes. 35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 30 Select the next pipe segment to the right. select 50mm. select 40mm. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria. select 40mm to comply with the design criteria. and click to select them.

Next. you place a tag and include a leader line. and finish placing the pipe tags. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. 42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). Modifying Pipe Diameters | 417 . Next. select Leader. 43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. They display only in the view in which they were placed.NOTE Tags are view specific. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell.

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. In this exercise. In the lesson. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 45 In the Save As dialog. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. navigate to the folder of your choice. Finally. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Finally. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System. finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. each system was completely different. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. Sprinklers Serviced 1. and click Save. For additional practice. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. you tagged the pipes. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. you confirmed the logical systems using the System Browser. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. and finish tagging the pipes. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. Although the creation and modification methods remained the same. 418 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. 2 3 4.

419 . the existing building shell will be maintained and restored.Documenting Your Projects 2 In this section of the tutorials. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. exterior fire stairs. lofty ceilings. balconies. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2008. and a roof garden. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section.

slight modifications to the building design have been made.NOTE For training purposes. 420 | Chapter 6 Documenting Your Projects .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 421 . you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 6 In this tutorial. including plan. section. elevation.

You learn how to create new views from existing views. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating Views In this lesson. how to create section and elevation views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you learn how to create views from a building model. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. 422 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans.rvt. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 423 . click Training Files. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan.

hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. Next. and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. 424 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 Under Floor Plans. 14 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. click the current scale. enter Vicinity Plan.

Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.16 Right-click. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 425 .rvt. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. for Scale. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select1:100. 426 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Building Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the Type Selector. click Elevation.rvt.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. enter South East. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 427 . 8 On the Design Bar. double-click South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. click Modify. under Elevations. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.

select Section: Building Section. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. for Scale. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 428 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Selector.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. and double-click Level 1. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. under Views (all). click Section.

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. and click to place it. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 429 . drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair.

21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 430 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 24 Select gridline F. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

Creating Callout Views | 431 . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view.25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . click Modify.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Level 1.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. select 1:50. click Callout. 432 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. and specify a point to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. under Floor Plans. and select the callout boundary. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 3 In the Type Selector. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. select Floor Plan. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.■ Select the middle grip. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. Creating Callout Views | 433 . 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click OK. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.

select 1:50. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select Detail View: Detail. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 434 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 On the Options Bar. click Callout. for Scale. double-click Section 1. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 13 In the Type Selector.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections).

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 435 . expand Detail Views (Details). under Detail Views (Details). and click OK. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.

and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. the elevation markers. Existing stair callout head and boundary 436 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. You change the appearance of the section mark head.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and can be applied to the section line. and click OK. and click OK twice. select Section Head . clear any others. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Open. for Section Head. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Section Tail – Filled. Section Tail . Modifying View Tag Appearance | 437 . click Load into Project.rvt. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. click Duplicate. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. 15 Under Category. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll to Section Line. click Training Files. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Filled. select the current project. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. .Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Edit/New. select the section line. click the Annotation Objects tab. 10 On the floor plan. double-click Level 1. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.Custom. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 8 In the Name dialog. 12 For Section Tag. enter Section Head – Custom. select Custom-Section Head. and click OK. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

select 3. and select 2. . 22 In the Name dialog. enter 12. clear all others. and click Open. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm Square. Click OK. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load into Project. for Elevation Tag. On the floor plan. select the current project. select 12. 30 On the Design Bar. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. On the floor plan. and click OK.rfa. click Duplicate.5 mm. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line.5mm Square. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Training Files. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. enter 12. 27 Click OK twice. scroll to Section Marks. select Custom-Callout Head. 438 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . notice the square elevation markers that display. and select 3. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. For Line Weight. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 17 Under Category. 19 Click OK. open Metric\Families\Annotations.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Square.

45 For Line Pattern. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 6 mm. 40 Press ESC. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. and select 7. 39 Click OK twice. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. expand Callout Boundary. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 439 . 36 In the drawing. and select 4. . 38 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. click Duplicate. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and on the Options Bar. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 49 Click OK. 43 Under Category. select Dash. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. for Callout Tag.33 In the Type Properties dialog. select . For Corner Radius. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. scroll down to Callout Boundary. Click OK. click Edit/New. enter . The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 34 In the Name dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. select the callout. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 46 Under Category.

View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. You learn to create view templates. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. masking regions. under Elevations. To accomplish this. view regions. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and double-click East.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. filters. Creating a View Template In this exercise. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click Training Files. and apply it to multiple elevation views. The crop region displays as red. 440 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and visual overrides. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. 5 On the View Toolbar. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 Under Visibility. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 441 . clear Crop Region Visible. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 4 On the Design Bar. right-click East. under Elevations. 6 On the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and click Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Entourage. 8 Click OK. under Visibility. click Zoom to Fit. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. under Extents. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

20 In the Project Browser. and click Create View Template From View. click Apply. click OK. 15 On the View Control bar. double-click North. 17 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK.14 Click OK. under Elevations. 19 In the Project Browser. elevation markers. grids. right-click North. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 18 In the View Templates dialog. and click Apply View Template. 442 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. Callouts. 16 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click East. under Elevations. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and click OK. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. levels.

and click Properties. for View Range. select Level Below (Level 4). 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. select Level Below (Level 4).rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. View Range and Plan Regions | 443 . Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. select Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Level. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. for Bottom. right-click.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Edit.rvt. under Extents. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. double-click Penthouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

select Level 4. click Edit. under Floor Plans. Click OK twice. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. 444 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Level.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Roof Plan. for Bottom. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. Under View Depth. double-click Roof Plan. for View Range. under Extents. and click Properties.

select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. click Region Property. 16 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). select Unlimited. View Range and Plan Regions | 445 . 17 On the Design Bar. under Extents. click Edit. for Level. Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. for Bottom. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. In the left corner of the building.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Unlimited. 13 On the Design Bar. click Plan Region. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 11 On the Options Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. click Modify.

7 In the Filters dialog. under Views (all). in this case. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 5 In the Filters dialog. the fire rating of the walls. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click (New).rvt. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. enter Rated Walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Fire Rating. under Categories. 446 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . After you apply the filter. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and double-click Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. under Filters. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. and click OK. click the Filters tab. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click Edit/New. select Walls.

but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. To accomplish this. click Override under Patterns. for Pattern. and click OK. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. 9 Click OK. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. click Add.■ ■ Select contains. select Solid Fill. under Basic colors. 17 Using the same method. 11 Select Rated Walls. for Rated Walls. and click OK. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. Enter Hr. click No Override. for Color. 16 Click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. 10 On the Filter tab. Masking Portions of a View | 447 . 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 In the Color dialog. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 12 On the Filter tab. select the red color. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Projection/Surface. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Remove.

right-click. 448 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . as shown. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. click Show Crop Region.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Rename. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 5 On the View menu.rvt. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Masking Region. 8 Select the crop region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. select Invisible lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click (Rectangle).7 On the View menu. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. Masking Portions of a View | 449 . 12 On the Options Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 9 On the View Control Bar.

450 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Level 1. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.14 On the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Unit 18 Plan .

10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. Working with Visual Overrides | 451 . 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. and click Override. click No Override. for Color. select Solid fill. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click black. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. under Pattern Overrides. 4 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click OK twice. right-click. under Visibility.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. click the current scale. for Pattern. and click Rename. click in the Patterns field. and click OK. and click 1: 50. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 7 Under Cut. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Walls.

click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. clear Grids. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. under Visibility. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors. and click OK. 16 Under Visibility. 452 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 453 .

for Color. 25 Click OK twice. 454 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click a purple color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 21 Under Projection/Surface. and click OK. under Lines. click Override. select the sofa. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click OK twice. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 28 For Color. click By Category Override. 23 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click Projection Lines. select Dash. select a bright green color. 29 In the Color dialog. click No Override. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. right-click.20 Right-click. By using the previous method to make the selection.

30 On the Design Bar. right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 455 . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 33 On the View Control Bar. The hidden crop region is also revealed. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click . click . click Modify. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps.

rvt. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. how to add views to the sheets. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 456 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click OK. click Sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. click Training Files. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.34 Click File menu ➤ Save.Creating Sheets. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

For Sheet Name. 3 In the Project Browser. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). enter A101. and select the title block. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . click Modify. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). enter Site Plan. For Sheet Number. on the Options Bar.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 5 When the title block highlights. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. Creating Drawing Sheets | 457 . Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar.Unnamed.

MA 12345 12 Click OK. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Project Number. 2007. enter Freighthouse Flats. under Other. click Edit. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter 15 May. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Status. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter 2007-1. For Client Name. 7 On the Design Bar. For Project Name.■ Click OK. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter J. click Modify. 458 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Project Address. Smith. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter For Approval. 14 Click OK.

right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Elevations A107 . under Sheets (all).Elevations A105 . double-click A102 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. for Name. 17 In the Project Browser. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and drag it to the sheet. click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Stairs In the following exercise. under Floor Plans. and click Save. 2 In the Project Browser. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. right-click. Adding Views to Sheets | 459 . enter Floor Plan. and click Rename. select A0 metric.Sections A108 .Floor Plan. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . you add views to these sheets. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. and click to place the view.Elevations A106 . and click OK.rvt. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. select the new sheet name.Layout Plan A104 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Level 1.

align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). double-click A104 . drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Modify.The red border around the view no longer displays. 460 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Elevations. 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.

and click to place it. and on the Options Bar. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.Sections. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 16 Select title bar. and click to place it. double-click A107 . . under Sheets (all). and click OK. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Scale. click Modify. select 1:5. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Adding Views to Sheets | 461 . Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 12 On the Design Bar.

double-click Level 1. move the cursor over it. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 .NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 462 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and press TAB until it highlights. 18 Under Floor Plans. zoom in to the grip.Stairs. under Sheets (all). 21 Zoom to the stair callout.

22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. In order to do this. double-click A107 .Sections.rvt. you must first activate the view on the sheet. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and then make changes and deactivate the view. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 463 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.

and click Activate View. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 464 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 Right-click.2 Select the building section view. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 5 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. enter 16700 mm. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. click Modify. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. right-click. and click Deactivate View. double-click North. 7 In the Project Browser.

you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 7 Place the camera as shown. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. click Camera. under Floor Plans. right-click.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. enter Title Sheet. and click OK. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. The camera view displays. 3 In the Project Browser. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter T. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. select the new sheet name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. You modify the view to hide the view title. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 465 .rvt. After you create the sheet. For Sheet Name. double-click Level 1. select A0 metric. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.

click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. enter 1500 mm. 14 Under 3D Views. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. For Far Clip Offset.Title Sheet.8 On the Options Bar. enter 18000 mm For Target Elevation. select Far Clip Active. 13 In the Project Browser. Under Camera. double-click T . 12 On the View Control Bar. under Sheets (all). for Eye Elevation. Click OK. enter100000 mm. Under Extents. 466 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 11 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.

and on the Options Bar. for Height. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. enter Viewport/no title mark. 22 In the Name dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet.15 With the view selected. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 467 . 25 On the Design Bar. . The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 635 mm. Under Model Crop Size. click Edit/New. Click Apply. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. on the Options Bar. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Modify. 24 Click OK twice. click Modify. under Graphics. click Duplicate. select No. and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. for Show title. click Size.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 468 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.Tagging and Scheduling 7 In this tutorial. such as room and window schedules. such as doors and windows. in your Revit MEP 2008 projects. 469 . You also learn to create different types of schedules.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. 470 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. expand Floor Plans.Level 1. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.Tagging Objects In this lesson. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Room Separation. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Room and Area. Because of the open style floor plan. right-click in the Design Bar.

as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 471 . move the cursor to the right.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.

14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 15 On the Design Bar. 472 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify. and select the room tag. and click to place the room and tag. click Load. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click Room. 13 On the Options Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 11 In the Tags dialog. The room tag number displays in blue. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click OK. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it can be edited. click Training Files. verify that Tag on placement is selected.7 On the Design Bar.rfa.

17 Click the room text label. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. enter Entry. and press ENTER. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. click Room. enter U18-1. Click to place the new room and tag. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click it. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor.16 Zoom in on the tag number. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 473 . and press ENTER.

474 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Sequential letters are also supported. and press ENTER. Dining. 21 Click the room text label. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. enter Kitchen.

Model Categories tab. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. expand Floor Plans. The rooms are already placed. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 26 On the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Modify. in the Project Browser. Tagging Doors and Windows | 475 . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. expand Lines. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. clear Room Separation.Level 2. click Room Tag.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. but they need to be tagged. and moving clockwise. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you learn how to place door and window tags.

clear Leader. under Identify Data. 476 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Mark. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. and click OK. click (Properties). enter U18-2. and on the Options Bar. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. enter U18-1. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. 3 On the Options Bar.

under Category.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. and click OK. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. Tagging Doors and Windows | 477 . 13 On the Design Bar.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. select Door Tags.

click Load. and click OK. 21 Click OK. 19 In the Tags dialog. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. expand Floor Plans. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. select Window. 478 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway.rfa. and double-click Level 1. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged.

rfa. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 28 Select Window Tags. double-click Level 2. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tagging Other Objects | 479 . 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view.rvt. 5 At the confirmation prompt. click Tag All Not Tagged. 25 Under Floor Plans.Level 1. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Select a dining room chair. you learn how to tag furniture objects. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. click Training Files. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Zoom flyout. and modify the tag placement and display. click Tag ➤ By Category. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. select Leader. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Yes to load a tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. 26 On the View toolbar.

clear Leader. 12 Click the elbow control. and drag it above the chair tag. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 11 Select the tag for the table. 13 Optionally. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1).8 Select the furniture in the living room. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 480 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 Click Modify. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and on the Options Bar. 9 Click Modify.

All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click (Filter Selection). click Tag All Not Tagged. click Modify. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. Tagging Other Objects | 481 . and on the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Level 2. 20 On the Options Bar.

you learn to add schedules. and click Modify. and click OK. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Furniture Tag: Boxed.21 In the Filter dialog. 22 In the Type Selector. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tags. 482 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. click Check None. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson.

that is. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 483 . a schedule that lists every window in the building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Next. in which windows are listed by window type. click Training Files.You begin by creating a window instance schedule.

select Comments and click Add. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Category. select Windows. and double-click Level 1. 484 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 Under Available fields. and click View. expand Floor Plans. enter Building Window Schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. 9 Click OK. 7 Using the same method. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 For Name. click the Fields tab. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. and click OK. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.

11 If the confirmation dialog displays. in large building models with many views. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. this can be a time-consuming process. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. click Close. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. If no open view shows the selected element. right-click the schedule. select Type Mark. NOTE By clicking Show. for Sort by. you are prompted to open one that does. under Other. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. Creating a Window Schedule | 485 . 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit. 13 In the Project Browser. click Show. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. and on the Options Bar. However.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 486 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . under Other. under Floor Plans. for Sorting/Grouping. double-click Level 2. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. clear Itemize every instance. and press ENTER. sorted by type mark. and click View Properties. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types.The window schedule is displayed. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. click Edit. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. The window type schedule is displayed.

Under Parameter Data. enter Head Detail. 5 Click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. click Add to create the new parameter. For Group parameter under.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. expand Schedules/Quantities. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Construction. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and.rvt. select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. and double-click Building Window Schedule. For Discipline.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. click OK. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you cannot use them to tag objects. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 487 . for Name. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. jamb. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. In this case. unlike shared parameters. and sill conditions for a window can be found. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

enter Window Details. select Head Detail. click in the Head Detail header. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. so that they are listed before Comments. click Group. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. click Edit. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. under Available fields. under Other. and Sill Detail. 12 Click OK twice. select the following fields. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 488 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Fields. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. right-click Building Window Schedule. TIP To select all 3 headers. Jamb Detail. and click Properties. and while pressing the left mouse button.

You then hide the column used for the filter. under Type Mark A. click the Fields tab. Select contains in the second field. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Enter U18 in the third field. enter 1/A107. select Doors. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. and for Sill Detail. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. enter Unit 18 . Verify Schedule building components is selected. click Schedule/Quantities. expand Floor Plans. for Jamb Detail.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. for Head Detail. 4 Click OK. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 489 . you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Under Name. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Verify the Phase is Phase 1.Level 1. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. enter 2/A107.rvt. select the following fields. For example. enter 3/A107. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 6 Under Available fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser.Door Schedule.

15 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. and double-click A102 .8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 10 Under Fields. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. and drag it to the sheet. but is not included as a column in the schedule. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 490 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. select Mark.Door Schedule. select Hidden Field. click Modify. 11 Under Field formatting. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. and click OK. select Family and Type. expand Sheets (all). click Unit 18 .Unit 18.

You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. select Number. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 8 Click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan.rvt. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Category. 5 Using the same method. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. and click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Available fields. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. 7 To the right of Header text. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. right-click in the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click View. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. select Rooms. and click Add.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. Creating a Room Schedule | 491 . double-click Level 1.

For 103. and press ENTER. The room Number is U17-9. 10 Edit the number to be 101. 101-106. 492 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 11 Using the same method. select Storage. For 105. click New. for room 101. For 102. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. enter Corridor. select Corridor. and press ENTER. add 5 more rooms. for Name. For 104. next to Rows. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. enter Storage. enter Building Entry. and press ENTER. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule.

and click OK. For Weight. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Floor Plans. In the Lines field. click Room Separation. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.■ For 106. click Override. double-click Level 1. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 493 . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.rvt. click the Lines field. you add room separation lines. expand Lines. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. place rooms from a program list. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. click the Color field. click the bright green swatch. In the Line Graphics dialog. Under Custom colors. enter Stair. and modify room names. under Projection/Surface. and click OK. For Room Separation. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select 9.

494 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . draw the horizontal line. click Room. click Modify. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. First. 8 On the Design Bar.

13 For Offset. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room. select 101 Building Entry. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 495 . for Room. enter 2400 mm. select 102 Storage.

Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 496 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 16 On the Design Bar. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. double-click Level 1. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. click Modify. and zoom in to the Corridor. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans.

26 Select Schedule keys. while pressing CTRL. clear Room Bounding. and click OK. under Category. click Modify. click New to add a new row. under Constraints. under Available fields. 23 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 497 . as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. click Schedule/Quantities. enter As Selected. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Units. and click OK. and Wall Finish. click (Properties). select Rooms.19 While pressing CTRL. and for all 3 finishes. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 30 For Key Name. Floor Finish. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. 29 On the Options Bar. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). select Base Finish. double-click Room Schedule. 22 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. right-click Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. and click Add. 41 On the Options Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 36 In the Project Browser. for Fields. 498 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . All rooms are selected in the floor plan. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Check None.31 Using the same method. 42 In the Filter dialog. and click Properties. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Rooms. 39 On the View toolbar. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. double-click Room Schedule. Zoom flyout. for Available fields. 35 Click OK twice. for Room Style. under Floor Plans. 37 Under U17-8. select Units. click Room Style. click (Filter Selection). click Edit. under Other. under Schedules/Quantities. 32 In the Project Browser.

click (Duplicate). 47 Click File menu ➤ Save.43 On the Options Bar. and apply it to the Level 1 view. for Name. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 499 . select Units. under Identity Data. 45 In the Project Browser. 104. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 5 For Title. enter Room Type. expand Floor Plans. 8 Click OK. and click OK. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. select Service. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click OK. at the warning prompt. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and 106. and click Properties. right-click Level 1. For rooms 102 and 105. 103. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Room Type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Public. under Views (all). select Room Style. under Schedules/Quantities. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. click (Properties). for Room Style. 6 For Color. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. and click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click Room Schedule. click the Color Scheme field. select Room Type. and double-click Level 1. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined.

select Foreground. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Color dialog. for Display Color Fill in. clear Visible. click Modify. 18 On the Options Bar. select blue. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Custom color. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). expand Lines. click Color Scheme Legend.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click OK twice. and click OK. click Edit Color Scheme. 16 On the Design Bar. select the color legend. click Edit. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and clear Room Separation. click the value in the Color column. 500 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog.

24 Click OK. for Size. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. for Swatch Width. under Graphics.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. (Properties). click Edit/New. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 501 . 28 Under Title Text. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. enter 25 mm. and click OK twice. enter 5 mm.

You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 502 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. click Modify. under 3D Views. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.29 On the Design Bar.rvt. double-click {3D}. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building.

3 While pressing CTRL. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. For Then by. select Roofs. 9 Using the same method. Clear Itemize every instance. 12 Click OK. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. Under Field formatting.EPDM. select Material: Area. select Family and Type. under Available fields. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 4 In the Type Selector. under Category. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. click Family and Type. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Creating a Material Takeoff | 503 . select Material: Description. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. Select Grand totals. 11 Click the Formatting tab. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .Insulation on Plywood Deck .

Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. under Other. 24 In the Project Browser. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated.80 5. 23 In the Material Takeoff.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 504 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .35 The Estimated cost is calculated. for Fields. click Estimated Cost. select Calculate totals. enter Estimated Cost. and click Add. for the Material: Cost field. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. and click Properties. 17 Click Calculated Value. 22 For Field formatting. and under Fields. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). for Name. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Material: Cost. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. 21 Click the Formatting tab. 19 For Formula. and click OK twice. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 20 Click OK. under Available fields. click Edit.40 50. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

These shared parameters can be added to any family. For Units. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. regardless of category. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. You draw a travel path line. 28 Click OK 3 times. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. you create a shared parameter file.25 In the Element Properties dialog. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fields. either within family components or within the project template. ensuring consistency across families and projects. click Training Files. and schedule the total distance of each path. In this lesson. creating a generic tag to tag the family. tag the line. For Rounding. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 505 . click Edit. adding the shared parameters to a family. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. and are defined and stored in an external file. you create an exiting plan for the building. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 27 Click Field Format. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. and reporting the shared parameters. select 2 decimal places.rvt. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Formatting. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. select Fixed. click Estimated Cost.

click Training Files. click Create. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. 9 Under Parameters. for Name. and click Save. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. under Groups. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and click OK. click New. for Name. for Name. under Floor Plans. enter Path ID. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.txt. enter Travel Distance. 506 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Type of Parameter. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. 11 Click OK. enter Exiting. for File name. click New. click New. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Length. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 7 Under Parameters. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.1 In the Project Browser. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. and click OK. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.

enter Length. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 13 On the Design Bar. If you have multiple projects open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 507 . 9 In the Family Types dialog. click Add. 12 Click Apply. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. in the Load into Projects dialog. 11 In the Family Types dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project.rfa. 8 Select Instance. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 3 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. following the equals symbol (=). under Parameters. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. group it under Dimensions. click Family Types. and click Select. 14 If necessary.rvt.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and select Instance. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. select Constraints. click Add. select Shared parameter. under Dimensions. under Parameters. Click Training Files. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. for Travel Distance Formula. 7 For Group parameter under.

rft. 26 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Label. 508 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label.rft. under Parameters.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. click Select. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 17 Select Generic Tag. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and click OK 3 times. and click Open. click Training Files. 24 On the Design Bar. click Add. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.

enter M_Travel Distance Tag.rvt.Level 1. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 509 .rvt is selected. 30 In the Save As dialog. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. After the lines are tagged. select Path ID.27 In the drawing window. Placing. and move it down. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and click OK. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. and click Save. for File Name. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. click Load into Projects. and press DELETE. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Exiting Plan .Tagging. Placing. 29 Click File ➤ Save As.Tagging. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.

5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. click Component. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. and click in the center of the corridor. above the exterior door as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right.2 Zoom in to the corridor. 510 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 511 . 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL. click Modify.Level 2. verify that Chain is selected. and click (Properties). Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click outside of the building. click Modify. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. through the door. 8 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. for Path ID. under Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar.Tagging. click Component. Placing.7 Move the cursor down. clear Leader. enter 1-1. select the 2 dashed travel lines. click Tag ➤ By Category. double click Exiting Plan .

19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click above the door to the stair.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. move the cursor near the right corner. and click. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 512 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the center starting point. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. move the cursor to the left.

Placing. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. click Modify. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click OK. under Category. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. for Path ID. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 33 For Name. (Properties). 28 While pressing CTRL. enter 2-1. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. and click in the stair. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 513 . 27 On the Design Bar.Tagging.23 Move the cursor down. and click OK. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.

click Edit. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. under Available fields. select contains. in the second field. 35 Click the Filter tab. select Calculate Totals. and click OK twice. click Schedule/Quantities. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and in the third field. 43 In the Project Browser. 46 In the Project Browser. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Schedules/Quantities. select Path ID. and click Add. right-click the Design Bar. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. while pressing CTRL. 514 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 45 In the Rename View dialog.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 38 For Sort by. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 42 Click OK. 41 Under Fields. select Path ID. under Other. in the first field. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. and click OK. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 36 For Filter by. and click View. select Path ID and Travel Distance. and click Properties. and click Rename. click Training Files. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. enter 2-.rvt. for Filter. and under Field formatting. in the third field. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter 1-. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. for Filter by.

select the following fields. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. and click the browse button. 4 Under Available fields. expand C . under Categories. and click OK.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click OK twice. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 515 .Fixed Partitions.152 mm. for Assembly Code. click C1010145 . right-click Generic .Partitions . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click the Value field.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . and click Properties.Interiors\C10 . click the Fields tab. select Walls.2 In the New Schedules dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.

11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. under Database Name. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). select a location for the database file. 6 Click Finish. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click the File Data Source tab. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 3 Click New. under Database.9 In the schedule. click OK. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 516 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 Under Directories. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. and click Next. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.rvt. 8 In the New Database dialog. click Create. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. click OK in the dialog.mdb for Database Name. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click Training Files. 1 On the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Next. 10 When the confirmation displays. enter Revit_Project. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Additionally. and click OK to create the database. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN.

A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. in addition to the Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 517 . Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. 13 Close the exercise file. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category.

518 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

519 .Annotating and Dimensioning 8 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2008 projects.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 520 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. Relocating a Project | 521 . click Training Files. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.Relocating a Project In this exercise.

expand Views (all). you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. and click OK. for Elevation Base. click (Properties). click Edit/New. By entering 10000 mm in this step. 522 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. enter 10000 mm. enter8 mm Head . However. By selecting the Level 1 line. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red.Shared Elevation. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. The levels in the project are not shared. and press ENTER. 3 On the Options Bar. The south elevation is displayed. 10 On the View menu. and double-click South. In the Name dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). The elevation of the other levels remains the same. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 6 Click OK twice. select Shared. If you did that now. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. you specify the new location of the project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. Under Constraints. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm.

12 In the Type Selector. under Elevations.Shared Elevation. 14 In the Project Browser.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. Relocating a Project | 523 . The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. as well as other views of the building model. click Modify. double-click North. 13 On the Design Bar. select Level : 8 mm Head . The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.

select Level : 8 mm Head . In the Type Selector. and the Roof Plan level. 524 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning .Shared Elevation. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. click Modify.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. the Penthouse level. On the Design Bar. and select Levels 2-4.

Dimensioning In this lesson. “Dimensioning” on page 525. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. You place linear. click File menu ➤ Save As. permanent dimensions are created automatically. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In this case. multi-segmented. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and angular dimensions. In Revit MEP. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models.16 If you want to save your changes. expand Floor Plans. radial. and double-click Level 1. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. expand Views (all). Dimensioning | 525 .

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. and are created by selecting individual reference points. 526 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Dimension. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. select it. snap to wall centerlines. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. dimensions are aligned. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. By default.

Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Dimension. click Modify. Creating Dimensions | 527 . Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.5 Move the cursor above the view. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. The lock displays as locked. and click to place the dimension.

12 13 On the Options Bar. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. 17 Move the cursor up. above the plan view of the building. select Wall Faces. select the right endpoint of the planter. 528 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Prefer. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. but below the first dimension that you placed. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. select the right side of the curtain wall. and select it. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 11 Using the same method. 15 Move the cursor to the right. and select its left exterior face.

select Wall faces. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). click Modify. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 21 On the Design Bar.19 On the Basics tab. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. For Prefer. and select it. click Dimension. and specify a point to place the dimension. 26 Select the radial dimension. Creating Dimensions | 529 . 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

click (Properties). 30 On the Basics tab. on the Options Bar. 530 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 34 Select the horizontal line.28 With the dimension still selected. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). enter Typ. for Suffix.. verify Wall faces is selected. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. For Prefer. click Dimension. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. and click OK. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

click Modify.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 531 . 37 On the Basics tab. and click to place the dimension. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. you select only the wall.

3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. and select Widths. 532 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Openings. select Entire Walls. and double-click Level 3. Click OK. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For Pick. select Wall centerlines.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click Dimension. Click Options. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

8 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. 7 On the Basics tab. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. click Modify. and double-click Level 1.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. However. expand Views (all). where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. For example. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. When you place dimensions. and click to place the automatic dimension string. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 533. for a multi-segmented dimension.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. in some cases. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. expand Floor Plans. Controlling Witness Lines | 533 . you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions.

select Individual References. and click to place the dimension. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. and select it. 534 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 7 Using the same method. move the cursor down. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. click Dimension. verify Wall centerlines is selected.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select the right edge of the planter. For Pick. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer.

and select it. 11 Move the cursor down.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. 10 Using the same method. and specify a point to place the dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 535 . select the bottom right endpoint.

select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and drag the dimension down the wall. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. and when the wall centerline highlights.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. for Prefer. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. select Wall centerlines. and click to place the dimension. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. 16 On the Design Bar. 536 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select it. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. click Dimension. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark.

23 Proceed to the next exercise. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 537. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.19 Release SHIFT. click Modify. 22 On the Basics tab. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 537 . 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. After you create the new family type. and using the same methods. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 20 Release SHIFT. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise.

4 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 2 Click (Properties). text font. enter 3. Under Text. for Tick Mark. 538 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Text Size. and select the lower dimension. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Duplicate. enter Office Standard. 5 In the Name dialog. For Text Font.dimension tick mark.2 mm. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. select CityBlueprint. select Arrow 30 Degree.

select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. 10 On the Basics tab. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. ■ Click OK twice. click Modify. and select the bottom dimension. 7 On the Basics tab. select another font. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 539 . 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system.

select the angular dimension on the planter. 540 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . create a new angular dimension type. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and how to add leaders to the text notes. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 540. and modify it to use the office standard parameters.11 Using the same method. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes.

click (None). 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. but below the upper dimension string. and click and drag to create a text box.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. click Text. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. zoom to planter near grid line 5. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 541 . for Leader. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.

8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 Select the text box. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. 11 Under Text. select Arc Leaders. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog box. enter EXISTING BUILDING. and click OK. and click OK. click Duplicate. enter 6 mm. and click OK. for Text Size. and click . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 542 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . under Graphics. If so. click Modify.5 In the text box.

A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. and enter Planting Bed. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 543 .Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). click Text. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

select Arrow 30 Degree. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Click OK twice. for Text font. 24 On the Design Bar. Under Graphics. and click OK. for Leader Arrowhead. 544 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . In the Rename dialog. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. for New. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). click Modify. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Standard Notes. Under Text. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. click Edit/New. 20 On the Design Bar. select CityBlueprint. Click Rename. click Modify.

for Leader. 26 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Options Bar. click Text. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 545 . 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. over the Planting Bed text. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. select Text: Standard Notes. click to place the text box.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. click (Arc).

and enter 457 mm Conc. and save the exercise file with a unique name.31 Click in the text box. 32 If you want to save your changes. 546 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Wall.

These components display at the required scale.Detailing 9 In this tutorial. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. like a standard door header condition. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. plywood. and metal studs. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. 547 . you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2008.

and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. add detail components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. In the callout view. you detail the view of the roof edge. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. After you add components. click Training Files. as well as detail lines. and insulation objects.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. region objects. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. 548 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Detailing the View In this exercise. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. which means that all detail components. you trace over the building model geometry. They are also view specific. In order to detail from the building model.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load detail components.

click . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. and click OK. click Detail Component. click Repeating Detail. double-click the detail callout head. 17 In the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 10 On the Options Bar. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.5mm. 8 Delete the component. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and click OK. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 15 For Spacing. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select As underlay. Exact location is not important. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 13 In the Name dialog. The roof overhang detail displays. click Training Files. 7 In the drawing area. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Detailing the View | 549 . 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click Open. 16 Click OK twice. select Corrugated Metal. 5 In the alert dialog. enter 406.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Duplicate.

19 On the Design Bar. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Detail Component. click Modify. 550 | Chapter 9 Detailing . NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. and press DELETE.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 23 On the Options Bar. click (Move). Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. click Load.

26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 30 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. and place it in the detail view as shown. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.rvt. click Training Files. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. press SPACEBAR 3 times. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Open.rfa. Because you still have several components to load. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 32 To properly orient the component. and click Open. click OK. click Detail Component.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 34 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 551 . 25 In the Type Selector.

39 Select the horizontal segment. select Chain. click Insulation. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 38 Click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows. 552 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 36 On the Options Bar. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.

Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. enter 140mm. 43 Click Modify. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. as shown. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. select to near side. For Offset. ■ Click Modify. 46 In the Type Selector. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Detailing the View | 553 . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component.

Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 2 In the Type Selector. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Thin Lines. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 52 Click Modify. meaning they display only in this view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 554 | Chapter 9 Detailing . you add lines to your detail. 4 Click Modify. they are view specific. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. Like detail components. and lock the component. as shown. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm.48 In the Type Selector.

9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 10 On the Design Bar. as shown. For Offset. 7 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. enter 10mm. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. Adding Detail Lines | 555 . as shown. enter 10mm.

and draw the detail lines as shown. 18 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. as shown. click (Draw).Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 556 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and clear Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain. draw the detail lines as shown. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut.

for Graphics ➤ Display Model. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. select the Penthouse level line. 26 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail).20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and press ENTER. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. right-click. and click OK. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 24 On the View Control Bar. When you turn the display model off. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Do not display. and click Properties. 22 In the Project Browser. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. For Offset. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select Vapor Barrier. Adding Detail Lines | 557 .

rvt. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 In the Type Selector. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 32 Click Modify.29 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 558 | Chapter 9 Detailing . press SPACEBAR as necessary. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. click Detail Component. select M_Break Line. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. “Adding Text Notes” on page 558. you add text notes to complete the detail.

. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click Dimension. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.2 On the Options Bar. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Enter the text. and click OK. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. and click (Properties). Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 6 Click Modify. 7 Select the dimension line. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. enter Typ. Adding Text Notes | 559 . for Text ➤ Suffix.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. and click Rename. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and selecting the chain. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. “Creating Detail Components” on page 560. (Filter Selection). 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof Overhang Detail. select all the coping linework. and save the exercise file. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. pressing TAB.Keynotes. while pressing CTRL. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. 7 Click Modify. right-click.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. select a text note. and click OK. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and press DELETE. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. click Select All Instances. right-click. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. right-click. click 6 In the Filter dialog. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 560 | Chapter 9 Detailing . on the Options Bar. and click OK. enter Roof Overhang Detail .

in the Type Selector.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Keynotes view is not the open view. 22 Click Modify. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 25 In the Filter dialog. and click Save. and click Open. click Training Files. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click . double-click it in the Project Browser. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. for File name. click Load into Projects. clear Detail Items.rft. 14 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. and the component can be placed in the detail. select the coping. The original linework remains selected. Creating Detail Components | 561 . navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. While pressing SHIFT. click Detail Component. 23 Using a window. 16 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 21 To place the component. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . enter Roof Edge. and click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 24 On the Options Bar. navigate to your preferred location. 18 In the Save As dialog.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 In the drawing area. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. and click Open.rvt. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. and click Open. 28 On the Options Bar. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Training Files. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 27 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. click Detail Component. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. delete the underlying linework. and click OK. In the Keynotes dialog. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 2 In the alert dialog. “Adding Keynotes” on page 562.rfa. Click to place the leader arm.rfa.26 Press DELETE. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Using the same method used previously.B5. click Load. 562 | Chapter 9 Detailing . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you place keynotes on objects. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Training Files. 63mm Rigid Insulation. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.

click in the Value column.F1. Adding Keynotes | 563 . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.C1. 6 Click Modify. use keynote 07645. use keynote 06160.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.I1.D1. For the 50 x 150. use keynote 06160. select the metal fascia with drip edge. For the metal coping. use keynote 09250. 19mm Plywood.F1. 11 Click OK 3 times. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. use keynote 06110.D11. FasciaProfile_1. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.G1.D11. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 50 x 200. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. navigate to 07645. use keynote 06110. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. click Keynote ➤ Element. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. click Edit/New. Roof Edge4. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). 12 On the Design Bar. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. use keynote 06110.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. click Training Files. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. select the left end point of the reference line. using keynote 07460. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Save As dialog. for File name.A8. 18 Save the file.20 Ga. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 17 Keynote the component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 15 In the Type Selector. click Lines. 5 In the drawing area. and select the right end point.14 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 564 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and click Modify. navigate to your preferred location. You do this in order to keynote the component.rvt. 6 Lock the line. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. and click Open. click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. click Load into Projects. select Corrugated Metal. 22mm Corrugated Steel .rft.

24 While pressing CTRL. 27 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 565 . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 20 Click OK 3 times. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click the end points at the top of the roof. enter EPDM Membrane. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. select m_Light Line Detail Component. select Medium Line Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. and hidden) used in the view. 30 Click Modify. click Training Files. click Load. 13 In the Type Selector. and click . and click (Properties). click Detail Component. 29 In the drawing area. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. click Duplicate. 37 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. 31 Select the component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. invisible. 25 Next. 19 In the Name dialog.A1. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. and click Open. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Click Modify. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.11 Press DELETE. 34 In the Name dialog. and click OK. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click in the Value column. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 16 Select the component.

and click . Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. against the 3/4" plywood. click Detail Component.38 On the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 07260. 46 Click Modify. 44 On the Design Bar. and click . (Move). click Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. 40 Click Modify. 41 Select the component just added. 53 On the Options Bar.A5. and assign it keynote 06110.G1. 49 With the component selected. select Chain. 48 Using the same method used previously. name the component Air Barrier. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 47 Select the component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 566 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 52 In the Type Selector. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 42 Using the same method used previously. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and click the lower end at the break line.

add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 61 In the drawing area.55 Click Modify. Air Barrier.A4. name the component Vapor Barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 60 On the Design Bar. 50 x 200 Framing. and Vapor Barrier. and click . click Keynote ➤ Element. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 58 Using the method used previously. leaving the detail component lines. and assign it keynote 07260. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 567 .

You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.rfa. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and close the text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 71 Save the file. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.. 69 Using the method used previously. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. select Invisible Lines. and press TAB. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and press TAB.A9. 67 In the drawing area.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. Enter 07463. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 568. The database file opens in a text editor.rvt.txt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Enter 07460. and assign it keynote 07210. 568 | Chapter 9 Detailing . click File menu ➤ Save. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. select the component.A1. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. click Load into Projects. in the Type Selector.A4. 3 In the text editor. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 70 In the drawing area. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 63 In the drawing area. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click . and press ENTER. name the component Batt Insul. 68 Select the component.rfa. add a keynote for the component. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit.

Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. and click OK. Creating a Drafted Detail | 569 . 11 Click Modify. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. select all the keynotes. and click Open. and click to place the note. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click OK. click to place the leader.A1. 9 In the drawing area. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Each keynote displays as a simple number. under Keynote Table. In the Type Selector. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. select Absolute. After you create a drafting view. 13 Click Modify. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. navigate to 07463. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. click Browse. 14 Save the file. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. under Path Type. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. you learn how to create a drafted detail. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.txt.

under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). For Layer/Level Colors. select Black and white.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select Center-to-center. 570 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click Open. for Scale. The detail that you import is in DWG format. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.dwg. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. select Reference other view. click Training Files. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. select 1 : 5. The detail is imported as an import symbol. right-click Drafting 1. enter EPDM Metal Coping.

click Edit/New. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 5 Click Modify. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. click Modify. for New. 12 Click OK twice. 6 Select the callout. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. enter Detail . 9 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. and double-click the callout. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. delete the existing value. 10 In the Rename dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. Creating a Reference Callout | 571 . The callout head no longer displays a reference label. click Rename.

verify that the scale is 1 : 5./Det./Sect. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click A105 . 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 3 On the View Control Bar. 18 Save the file. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. for Name.Elev. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 572 | Chapter 9 Detailing .rvt. “Creating a Detail in the Drafting View” on page 572 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. and click OK. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. The callout is updated with the sheet information. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.No Reference). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

select Gypsum-Plaster. click Region Properties. and enter 20. 5 In the Type Selector. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it.5mm. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 573 . for Name. enter Gyp. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 19 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. and click OK. click Filled Region. Draw a rectangle as shown. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 11 In the Name dialog.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. . 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click . ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. select the width dimension. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Board. 18 While pressing CTRL. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 17 Click Modify. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select Wide Lines. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click OK 3 times.

Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click 22 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. (Draw). and click above the top of the region as the end point.20 On the Design Bar. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). 574 | Chapter 9 Detailing . Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. Move the cursor up. and on the Edit toolbar. 24 Select the mirrored region.

click Duplicate. 30 In the Name dialog.25 Click Modify. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. 33 Click OK 3 times. click Region Properties. and click OK. and select the right edge of the wood region.Finish. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Align). 37 On the Design Bar.Finish. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Edit/New. click . 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. select Wood . Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. . in the Type Selector. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 575 . for Name. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown. enter Wood .

38 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.5mm.

42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add a reference plane
43 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 44 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick).

For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

46 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

576 | Chapter 9 Detailing

47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 48 Click Modify.

Add a door panel
49 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw).

■ ■ ■

For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER. Select Chain.

53 Draw the door panel outline:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.

54 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 577

Add mounting/sliding hardware
57 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 59 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.

60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.

Add mounting/sliding hardware
64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 65 On the Options Bar, click Load. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

578 | Chapter 9 Detailing

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

70 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 71 On the Options Bar, click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as a guide.

74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

Add detail lines
75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 579

78 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar, click .

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

82 Select the rectangle, and on the Edit toolbar, click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar, click .

(Mirror).

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

580 | Chapter 9 Detailing

87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

89 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left, as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 581

92 Select the line, and on the Edit toolbar, click

(Mirror).

93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar, click .

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.

582 | Chapter 9 Detailing

99 Click Modify.

Add two break lines
100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 583

107 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown, and click Modify.

110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.

Add text notes to complete the detail
111 On the Design Bar, click Text. 112 In the Options Bar, click to create an arced leader.

113 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text. 114 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.

115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click

(Add Right Arc Leader).

116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

584 | Chapter 9 Detailing

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

118 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 585

586 | Chapter 9 Detailing

Finishing the Sheets

10

In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation, including:
■ ■

Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into project sheets

■ ■

587

Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

Creating a Note Block
In this exercise, you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Finishing-Sheets.rvt.

Load a generic annotation family
1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click East.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote - Hexagon.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

588 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown:

Create annotation marks for items requiring notes

10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate, and click OK.

12 On the Edit toolbar, click

(Copy).

13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.

Creating a Note Block | 589

14 With the copy selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag, enter B. 17 Click OK. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

19 On the toolbar, click

(Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.

20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.

590 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

21 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 22 Optionally, using the table as a reference, and moving counter-clockwise, continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration:
Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.

Create, format, and place a note block on a sheet
23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog, for Note block name, enter Exterior Construction Notes, and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add. Select Text, and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.

Creating a Note Block | 591

■ ■

On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center. On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 6 mm in the second field, and select Bold.

26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.

27 In the column header (text), enter Description. 28 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A103 - Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Exterior Construction Notes, and drag it to the sheet.

30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.

33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

592 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Using Drawing Lists
In this lesson, you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

Creating a Drawing List
In this exercise, you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add. Select Sheet Name, and click Add. On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does not equal, and in the third field, enter T. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.

4 Click OK. The drawing list displays.

5 In the list title field, enter Sheet Index. 6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Sheet Index, and drag it to the sheet.

Using Drawing Lists | 593

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame schedule, and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Creating a Symbol Legend
In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view
1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.

594 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Add symbols to the legend
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

M_Section Head - Filled Level Head - Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote - Hexagon : Tag

Create a text type
5 On the Design Bar, click Text. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

6 On the Options bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, for Name, enter Legend Text, and click OK. 9 For Text Font, select Arial. 10 For Text Size, enter 3mm, and click OK twice.

Add text to the legend
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ ■ ■

Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag

Creating a Symbol Legend | 595

drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. expand Sheets (all). click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Legends. and double-click A101 . 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. select Viewport : No Titlemark. double-click A102 . click Typical Symbol Legend.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.Site Plan/Floor Plan. under Sheets. 596 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar.

click Legend Component. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Medium for Detail Level. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. 3 For Scale. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. for Name. select Section. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. For Host length. and press ENTER. click New ➤ Legend. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise.20 In the Type Selector. Creating a Component Legend | 597 . 21 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Viewport : No Titlemark. enter 900 mm. For View. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet.rvt. and click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. select1 : 50. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.

click Modify. 598 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 10 Select the second wall. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text.9 On the Design Bar. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and on the Options Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 12 In the Type Selector. for Family.

and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. The text note with leader is added to the legend. Creating a Component Legend | 599 . 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. for Leader. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 19 Enter the following text.13 On the Options Bar. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text without a leader. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.

double-click Level 4. select Level 4. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click New Sheet. click Modify to end the command. 600 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. select 4th Floor Wall Types.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 25 In the Project Browser. The open drawings are both visible. 26 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the new sheet. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 29 In the project Browser. under Legends. click OK to accept the default titleblock. right-click Sheets (all). 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. drag it onto the sheet. under Floor Plans. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser.

indicating that it captured the wall type properties. click (Match Type). 33 In the floor plan view. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Creating a Component Legend | 601 . Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. select the Wall Type 2 component. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall.

Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. 36 On the View Control Bar. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. 37 Optionally. select Medium for Detail Level. contractor inquiries. These changes can be due to owner requests. or changes in building material availability. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. In this exercise.35 Select the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. you 602 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

For example. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. If you select By Sheet. In general. If Visible is not selected. 2 On the Settings menu. Setting Up a Revision Table | 603 . Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. enter a date.use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. click Revisions. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. if the active revision is number 1. 3 In the Revisions dialog. 7 Under Visible. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. In most instances. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. double-click Level 4. When Issued is selected. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method.rvt. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. When you use this option. 5 For Description. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. Using the table. yet as concise as possible. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.

2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 Select the divider.8 Click OK. move the cursor up.rvt. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Edit toolbar. you make changes to the project floor plan. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 5 Select the partition. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. double-click Level 4. click (Move). Revision clouds have read-only properties. including revision number and revision date. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 604 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Revision Cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds | 605 . The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click near the partition you moved. 8 In the drawing area. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.6 On the Design Bar.

14 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 606 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Tag ➤ By Category. you load a revision tag into the project. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click OK. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. double-click Level 4. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select 6. for Line Weight. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

you create additional revisions in the revision table. you prevent further changes to the revision. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 In the Tags dialog. and because the revision is the first in the project.rfa. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Because you chose to number by project. You then issue a revision. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click Training Files. double-click A107 . After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. on which you place a revised view. 10 In the drawing area. click Tags. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. you create a sheet view in your project. click OK. Working with Revisions In this exercise.rvt. You do this by issuing the revision.Unnamed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In the Tags dialog. you need to add one. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. select Leader. Working with Revisions | 607 . the cloud is tagged as number 1. under Sheets. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. scroll down to Revision Clouds. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 6 Click Load. 5 In the Tags dialog.4 On the Options Bar. 11 Click to place the tag.

select Issued. 608 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . under Add. You can continue to add revisions. 6 In the Revisions dialog. for Visible. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. click Revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. NOTE After you issue a revision. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. On the Settings menu. click New. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. click Revisions. and click OK. select None for each issued revision. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. you can no longer modify it. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.

1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. such as images. Importing from Other Applications | 609 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. into a project. click Training Files.JPG. and place it on a sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn to import information from other applications. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.9 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. text. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. double-click T . Importing Image Files In this exercise. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and spreadsheets.rvt.Title Sheet.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. click Modify. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. under Sheets. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click Text. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click T . 6 Select the text. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.5 On the Design Bar.doc text file in another window. 610 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

mdi. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. click Modify.rvt. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click Modify. select the document writer. 9 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Desktop. Importing Spreadsheets | 611 . double-click A102 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. for Name. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.xls. for File name. click File menu ➤ Print. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 7 In the Revit MEP window. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click Training Files. and click Save. enter Fixture Schedule. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. with the new text box still selected. 3 In Microsoft Excel.JPG. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. This process may vary from system to system. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 10 On the Design Bar. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. under Sheets.JPG. This step has been completed for you. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.Unit 18. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 5 Click OK. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Under Printer. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window.

612 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. called dependent views. you break up the plan into sections. 613 . or footprint. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. as well as a large lab building. The large floor plan. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 11 In this tutorial.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 614 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .

| 615 .

The dependent view opens. double-click Level 2.Aviary. under Level 2. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. right-click Dependent on Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click in the drawing area. for Name. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 2 In the Project Browser. 616 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. enter Level 2 . right-click Level 2. 6 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Zoom To Fit. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 617 . and the model crop is the interior crop region.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.

618 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 10 On the Zoom flyout.Labs. 13 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 .9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 12 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout. 14 Click in the drawing area. for Name. click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on Level 2.

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 619 .17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. click Matchline. 20 On the Zoom flyout. 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click Level 2. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 620 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. and click.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.

Aviary. click Level 2 . for Line Weight. select Double Dash.Unnamed. and click OK. select 9. 33 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and click Rename. for Name. under Floor Plans. expand Sheets. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. enter Level 2 Aviary. click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline. right-click A101 . 31 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 621 . 28 For Line Pattern. and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.

double-click Level 2. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.Labs dependent view on the sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.35 On the Design Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . for Target view. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 39 On the Options Bar. and place the Level 2 .Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 622 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click View Reference.

click Modify. click (Show Crop Region). for Target view. click Zoom To Fit.Aviary. 46 In the Project Browser. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. under Floor Plans.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.Labs. 44 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 623 . double-click Level 2 . 47 On the View Control Bar.

select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. right-click.48 Select the crop region. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 49 If. 624 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. click the far right control. after modifying the annotation crop region.

After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 2. 55 On the Zoom flyout. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. and click Apply Dependent Views. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. but are not placed on sheets. select all views in the list. 57 On the Zoom flyout. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 54 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit.51 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 625 . expand Level 1.

select the Crop Region.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). right-click Dependent on South Elevation. click Training Files. right-click South Elevation.Left. enter South Elevation . The matchline is already placed in the view. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. 626 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. The dependent view opens. expand South Elevation. and click OK.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

16 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region). enter South Elevation . and click OK. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK. right-click South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. click (Hide Crop Region). 9 In the Project Browser. right-click A103 Unnamed. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 627 . 8 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. and drag it toward the center of the view.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. under Sheets. for Name. enter South Elevation. cropping the view to the aviary. 7 On the View Control Bar. for Name.Right. and click Rename. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.

for Target view. under Elevations. 25 On the Options Bar. and drag it onto the sheet.Left. 20 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. 628 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. click South Elevation .Right.Left is selected. double-click South Elevation. 23 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. under Elevations. 22 On the Design Bar. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. click South Elevation . 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation.18 In the Project Browser. click View Reference.

double-click A103 . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 629 . 30 On the Design Bar.28 On the Options Bar. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. for Target view. 31 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Sheets (all). select Elevation: South Elevation .Right.South Elevation.

and click Activate View.NOTE If the view references are not visible. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. 630 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . Select the crop region. Right-click the view.

Viewing and Rendering 3 631 .

632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering .

you learn to create and customize views of building information models. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. 633 . You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. More specifically.Viewing 12 In this tutorial. how to control fill pattern colors.

on the Standard toolbar. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. sections. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. 2 In the Project Browser. you learn how to access different views of the building model. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. click Training Files. expand Views (all). click . and double-click East. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. locate the Project Browser. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. including elevation and three-dimensional views. and three-dimensional (3D) views. expand Elevations.rvt. You create elevations. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. 634 | Chapter 12 Viewing . The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area.

Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. and click Hidden Line. the east elevation. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. click . click Visibility/Graphics. The default name of the view is {3D}. click the Annotation Categories tab. scroll down and clear Window Tags. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. This change is applied only to the active view. This change is applied only in this elevation view. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 6 Under Visibility. Exploring the Building Model | 635 . click Model Graphics Style. 7 Click OK.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog.

click X to close the view. and expand 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Move the mouse to pan the view. and click OK. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. . Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. click to reorient the view. and click Rename. The view follows the movement of the cursor. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. under 3D Views. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. 16 In the Rename View dialog. double-click My 3D View.9 On the View toolbar. . 12 Press and hold CTRL. You can pan. expand Views (all). 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 636 | Chapter 12 Viewing . NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. zoom. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. enter My 3D View. right-click {3D}.

and distance from the target. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view.rvt. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. After you specify the second point (the view target). expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. right-click in the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. eye height. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. m_Viewing_Exercise. click Camera. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 637 . Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Cameras define the eye point. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. and click View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. as shown in the following illustration. outside of the dimension lines. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags.

Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. and sideways to see how the view changes. 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. down. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. Move the cursor up. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Press and hold the left mouse button. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Dynamically Modify View. 638 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Press and hold the left mouse button. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model.

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 639 . You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. height. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click Tile.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. and target 12 On the Window menu. 13 On the View menu. Change the camera position. Four views of the model display in the drawing area.

The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1. 640 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and click Show Camera.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click Level 1. 16 In the Project Browser.

Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. 20 On the View Control Bar. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. and move it to another location. click Model Graphics Style.17 In My 3D View. click to create a new 3D view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 641 . under Camera. Click OK. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). and click Shading. and click Element Properties. In the Element Properties dialog. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. right-click. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values.

24 Click the section box. A section box is displayed around the model. A rotation tool is also displayed. 22 On the View menu. select Section Box. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. as shown in the following illustration. 642 | Chapter 12 Viewing . under Extents. and click OK. click View Properties. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces.

m_Viewing_Exercise. and rotate the section box around the model. Creating a Section View | 643 .26 Click and hold the rotation tool. Creating a Section View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. “Creating a Section View” on page 643. expand Floor Plans. and maximize this view. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. double-click Level 1.

8 Select the section line. expand Sections. select Floor Plan: Level 1. double-click the section head. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 6 In the Project Browser. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. click Modify. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. or in the Project Browser. and click Find Referring Views.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. 644 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. right-click. and double-click Section 1. View the section 5 To view the section. and click Open View. 7 In the Go To View dialog. select the section view.

10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Notice the change in the view direction. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. double-click Level 1. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. m_Viewing_Exercise. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. move the cursor around the building model. click Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. click Modify.rvt. under Floor Plans. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. Creating Elevation Views | 645 . 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. click Modify. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.9 On the Design Bar. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the change in section depth. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 645. 12 Select the section line. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise.

Do not select the arrow.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view.a. Elevation 1 .a by default. zoom in.b. double-click Elevation 1 . 646 | Chapter 12 Viewing . The elevation is named Elevation 1 . double-click Level 1. under Elevations. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. 10 In the Project Browser. and click. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. Elevation 1 .b. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation.

you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. and other families. click Training Files.rvt. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. and the insulation color to pink. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. and applies to phasing override materials as well.11 If you want to save your changes. in a compound wall. roofs. click Save As. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. such as Brick on CMU. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as the one below. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. In addition. a shade of gray. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 647 . This includes walls. For example. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. where each layer is assigned a different material. and open Common\c_Showroom. and save the exercise file with a unique name. in this case. on the File menu. floors. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise.

select Masonry .Level 3. select Masonry . 5 In the Color dialog.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Section Head . 2 On the Settings menu. select red. 3 In the Materials dialog. click Materials. expand 3D Views. The surface pattern of the brick is black. and double-click Wall/Floor Join .Brick for Name. 4 Under Cut Pattern. 648 | Chapter 12 Viewing . A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. and click OK twice. click Color.Brick for Name. expand Views (all).Filled). The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. 9 In the Materials dialog. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. and double-click 3D. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. click Materials. expand Views (all).

click Color. 2 On the View menu. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise.rvt. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649 . you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649. click View Properties. select white. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. expand Floor Plans. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser.10 Under Surface Pattern. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. c_Showroom. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. and click OK twice. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. 11 In the Color dialog.

select a shade of gray. on the File menu. 14 If you want to save your changes. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click Element Properties. If you create more than one plan region in a file. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. By default. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 2. 10 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. and click Fine. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK three times. although they may have 650 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and click OK.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. 7 In the Color dialog. select Solid fill for Name. click Detail Level. click Save As. right-click. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. click Modify. . click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. line color. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit MEP files. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. refer to the online Help for more information.coincident edges. click Training Files.rvt. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and you cannot control their visibility. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 651 . or pattern. line type. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan.

and double-click Level 1. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. expand Views (all). click Plan Region. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. click Lines. On the Options Bar. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. 3 In the Level 1 view.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 652 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and the view depth plane. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the following illustration. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. which is similar to the view range for plan views. Plan regions have a single property. expand Floor Plans. click . view range. the south elevation is also displayed. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height.

you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. By selecting Parent View’s Level. and then click OK twice. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. click Edit for View Range. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. top and bottom clip planes. under Extents. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 653 . 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane.■ ■ On the Design Bar. 6 In the View Range dialog. right-click. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. 9 On the Design Bar. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. and click Element Properties. click Finish Sketch. 4 Select the plan region. click Modify. Press ESC to end the command. When you select the plan region. the line turns red. 8 Click Apply. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. 654 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 10 If you want to save your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.

and posters. billboards. 655 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 13 In this tutorial. to place and render decals to create signs. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to produce rendered views.

change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. When you complete these changes. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. the floor. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. In this exercise. you select a scene that defines the model environment. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. After you create the perspective view. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. 656 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. and create the perspective view that you want to render. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise.

click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Under AccuRender. 3 On the Options Bar. under Name. select Masonry . click Edit for Structure.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. and click Edit/New. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. verify that Co-house . right-click in the Design Bar. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 657 . 2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction.rvt. and click the tab in the context menu. click Materials. click Wall. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.Cavity Wall .Brick. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. 8 In the Materials dialog.Brick.

Running. 22 In the New Material dialog. 11 Under Name. 21 In the Materials dialog. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. select Carib. click Duplicate.200mm. under _accurender. 25 Under Name.Asphalt. enter Aluminum. 27 On the Design Bar. select Site . 24 In the Material Library. 26 Click OK twice. 12 Click OK twice. click Materials. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. Polished and click OK. and click Aluminum. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. for Layer 2. . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Edit/New. select Polished. under Name.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. click Modify. click Edit for Structure. under _accurender. and click . 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 23 Under AccuRender. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar.Plain. 658 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 19 Click OK four times. under Name. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. expand Masonry and click Brick. 18 In the Materials dialog. expand Metals. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. under Construction.

select the curtain wall mullion again. and click OK. click Edit/New. select Exterior under Type. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. click in the Material field. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. under Materials and Finishes. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. floor. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 659 . 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. under Name. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. click Region Raytrace. 33 Click OK three times. 32 In the Materials dialog. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. select Aluminum. verify that New is selected.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. Polished. click No. and then click . Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click .

“Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660. producing a photorealistic effect.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. 38 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 660 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . when you render an exterior view of the model. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). floor.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click 1st Flr. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. m_Cohouse. you place two different types of trees on the building site. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. In a later exercise. Cnst. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe.

2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. and click . The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. select any of the deciduous trees. Adding Trees to the Site | 661 . click Site Component. Create a new type of tree. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. and click to place a tree. select M_Tree . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click Site. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. click Modify. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 7 In the Type Selector.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum .9 Meters. and click Site Component. 4 In the Type Selector. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. right-click in the Design Bar.

under Other. as shown in the following illustration. select Oak. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Identity Data. 662 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Under Name. click Edit/New. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 662. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. select Black Oak for Type Comments. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Under Other. and click OK. enter Black Oak. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. and click OK twice. 12 In the Plant Library.8 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. Black. m_Cohouse. and click OK. and place two black oak trees. click in the Value field for Plant Name. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click display the Plant Library. click Duplicate. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. under accurender. expand Trees and Shrubs. and click Deciduous.

Creating a Perspective View | 663 . 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. The new perspective view is displayed. Cnst. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. click Camera.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

view. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. expand 3D Views.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). 664 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. Cnst. and click Show Camera.

and click OK. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click Exterior. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 665. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Exterior. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 665 . right-click 3D View 1. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. you select a scene and specify time. and click Rename. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and environment settings that you use to render the view. place. date.7 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. m_Cohouse.rvt. lighting.

under Scene Settings. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. and click Sun. click the Solar Angles tab. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 6 Select By Date. Time. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 7 Under Date. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 666 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 8 Under Time. click Settings.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1).

19 In the Material Library. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 667 . Dark. click No. under Scene Settings. USA. click Site. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. click Image Size. under _accurender. click . Rye. and click OK.20 for Cloudiness. and click OK. click Raytrace. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. 21 Click OK twice. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. 18 Click Material. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. under Background Color. 17 Under Advanced. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 16 In the Environment dialog. select Autumn for Plant Season. select Grass. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.) 14 Click OK. click Capture Rendering. 11 Scroll down. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.9 Click the Place tab. select Good for Quality. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 10 Click in the Cities list. and enter bo. click Environment. 20 In the Name list.00 (many clouds. select Ground Plane. and select Boston. 13 Enter . 12 Click the Settings Tab. The Ground Plane tab displays. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. MA.

Cnst. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved.rvt. m_Cohouse. 32 If you want to save this exercise. expand Renderings. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). on the File menu. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. and double-click 2nd Flr. click Save As. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.30 On the Design Bar. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668. To create the rendered scene. define the view and render scene settings. Adding RPC People In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. expand Floor Plans. 668 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and finally.

Adding RPC People | 669 . 4 In the Type Selector.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 7 Repeat steps 4 .2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. click Component. select M_RPC Female: Cathy.

rvt. m_Cohouse. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. click Camera.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 670. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. 670 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click 2nd Flr. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. Cnst. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 671 . The interior perspective is displayed.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.

double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. enter 229 mm for Width. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. enter 178 mm for Height. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. under Size. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 672 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click the dimensions for Size. and click Rename.

15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. select Section Box. and click OK. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. and select the section box. A section box is displayed around the building model. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 673 .9 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 11 On the View menu. click View Properties. 12 On the View menu. under Extents. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. enter Interior. Grips are displayed on the section box. click to display the 3D view of the building model.

Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click Save. m_Cohouse. select New. under 3D Views.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. and select Boston. under Background Color. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 674 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. Time. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 17 In the Environment dialog. 10 Click the Place tab. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and click Save. 7 Select By Date. and click OK. By limiting the geometry. click the Solar Angles tab. 11 Click in the Cities list. and environment settings used to render the view. you create a render scene to specify the time. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. click OK. on the Main tab. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 8 Under Date. 9 Under Time. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674. 13 Click the Settings tab. and enter Interior Scene for Name. date. 4 Under Type. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under Scene Settings. place. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. and enter bo. USA. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Sun. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.rvt. you reduce the rendering time. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. MA. click Settings. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. select Interior. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. click Environment. under Scene Settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 Scroll down. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day.

click Site. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. click Radiate. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 675 . Dark. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. select Grass. such as windows and doors. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. under accurender. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. as daylight sources. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675. 24 Under Scene Settings. double-click Interior. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. 19 Click Material. Curtain Wall 1). 25 Proceed to the next exercise.18 Under Advanced. double-click {3D}. m_Cohouse. select Summer for Plant Season. under 3D Views. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. select {3D}. The Ground Plane tab displays. 20 In the Material Library. Rye. click OK. select Ground Plane. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. under Use View’s Section Box. You can select families with transparent materials. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. 21 In the Name list. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click Daylights. 22 Click OK twice.

which can take several minutes. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. the following rendered view is displayed. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. 9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file. . The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. When radiate completes. click Raytrace. begins. 676 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Save As. on the File menu. 8 On the Options Bar. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 On the Design Bar.The radiosity process.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. and open Common\c_Townhouse. click Training Files. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. proceeds through the dining room. and ends in the far corner of the living room.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit MEP 2008. but you can also define it in a 3D. If you prefer to use Metric values. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. In a plan view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 677 . you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you must select or define a scene. and change unit formats as desired. or section view. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. elevation. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise.rvt. click Settings ➤ Project Units. The walkthrough path is a spline.

Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. of the walkthrough. and double-click 1st Floor. and click the tab in the context menu. 678 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and double-click Walkthrough 1. expand Floor Plans. or the first key frame. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. and click to specify the start point. on the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Walkthroughs. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click .

enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 11 Under Change. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 12 On the View menu. click Edit Walkthrough. If it is not. 13 On the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. verify Field of view is selected. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. Creating a Walkthrough | 679 . 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 14 Click . The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. and select the crop boundary. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x).

3 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. and click OK. press ESC. click . enter 1 for Frame. click Edit Walkthrough. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 680. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 2 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. 17 Click . clear Far Clip Active. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). and click OK.rvt. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. c_Townhouse. 680 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Extents. The walkthrough plays. 16 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 681 . 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. You can move any camera target or key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. select Path for Controls. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.

4 Under Format.rvt. 2 In the Save As dialog. 682 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . hidden line. click Edit Walkthrough. double-click Walkthrough 1. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. shaded with edges. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 1 On the File menu. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. and click Save. without opening Revit MEP 2008. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. When you export the walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. The AVI is recorded. select <Shading> for Display mode. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Walkthroughs. specify 15 for Frames per Second. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 9 On the Options Bar. 3 Under Output Length.7 Click the third key frame position. and then click to play the walkthrough. or with AccuRender raytracing. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. If you are unsure of what option to use. c_Townhouse. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. shaded. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and click OK. 5 In the Video Compression dialog.

Recording the Walkthrough | 683 . click Save As. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. specifying the number of frames. reducing the size of the image. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and save the exercise file with a unique name.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. 8 If you want to save this exercise. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.

684 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.Creating Solar Studies 14 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. In this tutorial. 685 . More specifically. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.

expand Floor Plans. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and double-click 01 Entry. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Creating a Solar Study . and open Common\c_Solar_Study. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. 686 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.Courtyard View In this exercise. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. as shown. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A 3D view is created. click Training Files.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson.

enter Solar Study . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. you create a section cutaway view. 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. 9 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click to reorient the view.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Save As. expand 3D Views. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.4 On the View toolbar. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 687 . click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View. and click OK. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 687. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 10 On the File menu. and click Rename. click Modify. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. if necessary.

click Modify. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 5 On the Design Bar. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. expand Sections. click 10 On the View toolbar. 688 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .3 On the Design Bar. right-click Section 1. to reorient the view. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 6 To view the section. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Section. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click . double-click the section head. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.

3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 On the File menu. Typical plan views. clear Section Boxes. you create a plan cutaway view. 15 In the Rename View dialog. In some cases. 13 On the Design Bar. click Save. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 689 .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 16 On the View Control Bar. and under Orient to a View. to expand the dialog. and click OK. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. double-click 01 Entry. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. under Floor Plans. 17 To hide the section box. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689. On the Annotation Categories tab. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. do not display many elements in 3D. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Project Browser. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. as shown. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. under 3D Views. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. including the house. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. then select Medium. as shown. right-click {3D}. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. and click Rename. click Callout. then Fine.

6 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. to reorient the view. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. as shown. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. and under Orient to a View. 11 On the Design Bar. 690 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 12 Select the section box in the drawing area.4 In the Project Browser. click 8 On the View toolbar. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. and click OK. as shown. and click Rename. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click .

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. under 3D Views. and click Rename. and click OK. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 16 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 17 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the File menu. under 3D Views. so you can see into the building from the top. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 20 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 691 . Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. click Save. right-click {3D}. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 18 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.15 Select the Roof.

date. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. or multi-day solar study. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. you specify the location. 3 Select Cast Shadows. and time range. . 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. CA. Los Angeles. and double-click Solar Study . 10 Under Place. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. you specify the location. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. USA. You can create a still. For the Multi-Day solar study. 9 In the Name dialog. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. MA. expand 3D Views.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. date range. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. leave the slider at 50. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . and time. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.Courtyard View. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. For this study. USA is selected. enter Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click the Single-Day tab. click . and click OK. 692 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . expand Views (all).Boston. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Creating Solar Studies . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. and click Duplicate. select Los Angeles. single-day. for City. click . and click OK.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. For the Single-Day solar study.

■ For Time Interval. enter Winter Solstice. 2006. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. and click Duplicate. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click OK. Los Angeles. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . click . Clear Ground Plane at Level. 16 In the Name dialog. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. on the Single-Day tab. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 693 . under Sun and Shadows Settings. 19 On the File menu. For Time Range. under Frame. confirm that Summer Solstice.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 7 On the Options Bar. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Under Frame. 8 On the Options Bar. enter 20 and press ENTER. click To display the next key frame. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 6 On the View Control Bar. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693. 2 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date. click Save. select June 22. and click OK. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Los Angeles. click OK. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select December 22. enter 10 and press ENTER. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. . and click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. and click OK. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Winter Solstice.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 14 In this case.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Los Angeles is selected. click . you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 2006.

under Floor Plans. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. double-click 01 Entry. . on the Single-Day tab. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Click outside of the text box to end the command. 694 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .■ To display the next sequential frame. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Los Angeles. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 13 On the View Control Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click . select Summer Solstice. click Text. and click OK. approximately as shown. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Sun and Shadows Settings. click To play the animation from start to finish. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. The solar study animation plays. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. approximately as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. Click and enter Dining. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 14 On the Options Bar. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar.

as shown. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. click . and click OK.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 To display the section box. click Lines. On the Options Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. click . select Section Boxes. expand 3D Views. Los Angeles. as shown. on the Single-Day tab. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. Exporting the Study as AVI | 695 . 5 In the Project Browser.

and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed.Los Angeles. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. For File name. select Frame range. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. enter 450 in the first field (width). 696 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . as shown. for Model Graphics Style. if necessary. clear Section Boxes. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . 14 Click outside of the section box. Under Output Length. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 To hide the section box. For Dimensions. Under Format. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area.12 In the drawing area. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. select AVI Files. select the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. and enter 5 to 50. verify that Hidden Line is selected. For Save as type. For Frames per second. and click OK. verify that the value is set to 15. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. To maintain the proportions of the frame.

you open each image. and click OK. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. 20 On the File menu.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. for Compressor. select Frame range. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. for Model Graphics Style. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. enter 450 in the first field (width). 21 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Single-Day tab. TIFF. verify that Hidden Line is selected. or GIF. BMP. or any single-frame format. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 697 .Los Angeles. In this example. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. and enter 5 to 10. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Under Output Length. For Frames per second. NOTE When you export to PNG. click Save. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 697. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. verify that the value is set to 15. click OK. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Save. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. of the animation separately. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click Save. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. select Winter Solstice. 8 In the Save As dialog. depending on the Frame Range.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. For Save as type. 2 On the View Control Bar. To view the animation. click . the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. select PNG. or frame. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. For File name. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Under Format. For Dimensions. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. such as JPEG.

double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 698 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .9 On the File menu. click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.

5 Select the roof. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 699 . 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. and on the View Control Bar. as shown.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . MA. 8 On the View Control Bar. select One week. under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click Save. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. In the Save As dialog. 18 On the File menu. USA. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. clear Section Boxes.Boston.Week Interval. click the Multi-Day tab. On the Annotation Categories tab.Los Angeles . and click OK. specify 2:00 pm. and click OK. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click Save. For Time Interval. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. For Time. Click the Desktop icon. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. for Compressor. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 17 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. for File name enter 2pm . and click Duplicate. 700 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.

select Summer Solstice. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. on the Still tab. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. click the Still tab. In this exercise. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For example.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. click . 9 Under Date and Time. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 11 Under Date and Time. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. click Apply. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. Then. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. specify 11:00 AM for time. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click . and click OK. Orienting to True North | 701 . click .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. change the time back to 12:00 PM.

Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. click OK. Notice that the project rotates in the view. under Graphics. and select Winter Solstice. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. click . for Orientation. On the Options Bar. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. select True North. under Floor Plans. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. in the Angle from Project to True North field. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. click the Still tab. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and select View Properties. In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 702 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Save As dialog. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. for File name. 19 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. click OK. 21 On the View Control Bar. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click Summer Solstice.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. and click OK. For Save as type. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Summer Solstice. click the Single-Day tab. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. under 3D Views. including the angle from True North. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. are saved with the project. click . and click Apply. verify that AVI Files is selected. Orienting to True North | 703 .

rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Graphics. 28 Once you are finished with the study. Since a rendered image is temporary. for Dimensions. Rendered views do not have this limitation. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. and click OK. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655 for additional information on rendering. for Scene. In the Element Properties dialog. click GO. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. for Compressor. In this exercise. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. Click the Desktop icon. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. click Raytrace. under 3D Views. and click OK. 704 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and exporting it as a JPEG image. double-click 01 Entry. for Orientation. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. enter 600 in the first field. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. select Project North. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering.■ Under Format. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. capturing it. and click Save. On the Options Bar. for Resolution. and select View Properties. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. On the Options Bar. Right-click in the drawing area. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Save. 29 On the File menu. select Draft (75 dpi).

In the Project Browser. under Renderings. click GO.■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Save as Type. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 5 On the Design Bar. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. click Export Image. for Resolution. click Capture Rendering. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. and click Save. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. On the Options Bar. The scene is rendered in high resolution. Rendering an Interior View | 705 . click Save. select Presentation (300 dpi). select JPEG. In the Save As dialog. 7 Review some captured images of the building.

706 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

To express texture beyond material specifics. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 707 . you explore the stylistic approach. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended to describe number. For the realistic approach. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. In this series of exercises. a consultant. type." In Revit MEP. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Whether the audience is the general contractor. elevations. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. Advanced Model Graphics. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. an outside reviewer. and Section Boxes. sections. In this tutorial. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents.Presentation Views 15 In this tutorial. and details. the Linework Tool. length. or the client. there are several options for expressing the architecture. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views.

building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Co-house. 708 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Using the pre-built building model.

In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. right-click 2nd Flr. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. you create a presentation floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. expand Views (all). Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.rvt.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a copy of the plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 709 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click the Scale control and select 1:100. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Save As. sections. elevations. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 10 On the File menu. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. and click Rename. Down Arrow. expand the Stairs category.2 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. this represents the view getting smaller. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 8 Click OK. under Floor Plans. and clear DOWN Text. 7 Under Visibility. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Up Arrow. Notice that no annotations display in this view. UP Text. click the Annotation Categories tab. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click Visibility/Graphics. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and click OK. 710 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . dimensions. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and so on in this view. Cnst. click in the drawing area. exit the menu. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Notice the immediate change in the line weights.

Time and Place. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Cast Shadows. you can create. the darker the shadows. 8 Select Boston.rvt. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 711. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 711 .rvt. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. and click OK. ■ Under Intensity. select Sun and Shadow Settings. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. The higher the number. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. At that place. 2 On the View Control Bar. modify. and click Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. on the Still tab. MA. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. USA for City. double-click it in the Project Browser. 5 Under Settings. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select By Date. navigate to the folder of your choice. Within a Project.11 In the Save As directory. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Shadows Properties. click the Place tab. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. specify 35 for Shadow. click . click for Place. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. 6 Under Settings.

17 On the File menu. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. and select 1st Flr. you can enter any city you wish. 11 Click OK. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. under Settings. Cnst. be aware that if you enter a different city. click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. and click OK. click . click OK.NOTE For this step. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 712 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Save. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. however. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. clear Ground Plane at Level. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 713.

TIP If the View tab is not available. click Add View. and click View. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and click OK. and click to place it. and click Add View to Sheet. select Arch Portrait. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. 4 In the Views dialog. click Sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 713 . click Modify. and notice a view title displays. right-click the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan.

click Edit/New. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. enter Presentation. 12 In the Name dialog.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click OK. 714 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. click . This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. For this analytique. To accomplish this. select No for Show Title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. click Duplicate. under Graphics. and click Activate View.

and the boundary of the region. 22 On the Design Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 715 . click Duplicate. for Fill Pattern. click . click Edit/New. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 25 In the Name dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 17 In the Type Selector. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. If necessary. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click . Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 18 On the Options Bar. When you are finished drawing the chain. select Invisible Lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. click Region Properties. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. enter Solid Black. and click OK. under Graphics. click Filled Region. fill properties. 20 On the Options Bar. and select Chain. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click . You enter sketch mode where you define the line type.

enter Presentation for Sheet Name. scroll down. 30 On the Design Bar. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. select Solid Fill. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 716 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and click View Properties. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. under Identity Data. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click OK. click Save. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. 34 On the File menu. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 716. and click OK.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Finish Sketch. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click Deactivate View. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. under Name. 35 Proceed with the next lesson.

under Elevations.rvt. click in the Walls row. enter Presentation South Elevation. click Visibility/Graphics. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 717 . TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Views (all). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 Click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 3 In the Rename View dialog. expand the Doors category. under Pattern Overrides. right-click Copy of South. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Override. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. exit the menu. right-click South. and click OK. under Visibility. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 2 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click Rename. under Visibility. on the Model Categories tab. and click OK. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. scroll up. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. clear Visible. click in the drawing area. and clear Elevation Swing. expand Elevations.

17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. select Cast Shadows. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 718. 12 Under Shadow Properties. 16 In the Name dialog. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 13 Under Intensity. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 20 On the File menu. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. and click OK. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. By changing the angle of the sun. select By Date. click Save. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Time and Place. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Duplicate.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 718 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . specify 35 for Shadow. click . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. under Settings.

expand Sheets (all). and double-click A105 . click Add View. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 719 .Presentation.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Add View to Sheet. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.rvt. Notice the viewport displays a view title. 3 In the Views dialog. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. under Views (all). select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. Notice the view title no longer displays. 720 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select Viewport: Presentation.

click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.8 On the File menu. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 721. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 721 . You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.

Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. Cnst. To fit correctly in the analytique. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. click Section. To accomplish this. and double-click Section 2. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. double-click 1st Flr. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Section 2 is added to the building model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.rvt. 4 Add the section shown below. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select 1: 100 for Scale. 722 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

clear Visible. 10 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 100 for Scale. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click Modify. double-click Presentation Section 2. right-click Callout of Section 2. and click Rename. 7 On the Options Bar. click the Model Categories tab. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 723 . under Pattern Overrides. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Presentation Section 2. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). click Callout. 15 Under Visibility. 11 In the Rename View dialog. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). click Override. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click in the Walls row.

clear Annotation Crop. and click OK. Revit MEP displays 2 boundaries. and clear Elevation Swing. 724 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. under Extents. 22 On the Options Bar. scroll up. expand the Doors category. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. click .17 Under Visibility. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. When you select the crop boundary. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 20 Click OK. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. clear Crop Region Visible.

rvt. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 725 . 2 On the View Control Bar. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. under Sections (Callout 1). 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Presentation Section 2. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 725. specify 35 for Shadow. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click Save. Under Shadows Properties. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. Under Intensity. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. In addition. open the Project Browser and.24 On the File menu. Click Apply. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view.

TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. NOTE The line style. under Settings. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Silhouette Edges. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings.In the steps that follow. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 727. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. and click OK. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. was added to this dataset for training purposes. select Relative to View. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 5 In the Name dialog. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under Silhouette Edges. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 726 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select Override Silhouettes. select Directly. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. click OK. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. 11 On the File menu. click Duplicate. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. click .

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Type Selector. and click to place the selected view. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 727 . select Section: Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. The view title no longer displays. under Sheets (all).rvt.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. 6 On the Design Bar. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Modify. double-click A105 . 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.

specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and press ENTER. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. click . under Sections (Callout 1).Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. To rotate an object. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. Using a clock as a reference. In the steps that follow. 728 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you click to specify the start radius. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. double-click Section 2. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. and drag it up and to the left as shown. the callout rotates 180 degrees. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all).Presentation. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 729 . 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.

730 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 3 In the New View Template dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. enter Presentation.15 On the Design Bar. click OK.rvt. and click OK. 2 On the View menu. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Create View Template from View. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 16 On the File menu. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 730. After applying the view template to a new section view. 4 In the View Templates dialog.

click Apply View Template.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Now. and elevation swings no longer display. Notice the furniture. double-click A105 . Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select Viewport: Presentation. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. and click OK. click View Properties. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). annotations. you can simply apply the presentation view template. under Sections (Type 1). rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. 16 On the View menu. and click Rename. select Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Rename View dialog. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. Working with a Presentation View Template | 731 . lighting fixtures. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. click Add View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. right-click Copy of Section 1. enter Presentation Section 1. 15 Right-click the viewport. 12 In the Views dialog.

In this exercise. under Graphics. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 20 On the File menu. and click Deactivate View.17 In the Element Properties dialog. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. 732 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and click OK. such as a tracery window or column capital. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 732. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 18 Right-click the viewport.

under Sections (Callout 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 733 .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. select the callout. 4 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation Callout. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. After you add the callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. click Modify.rvt. double-click Presentation Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 1. double-click Section 1. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Rename View dialog.

7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. clear Annotation Crop. and click OK. under Extents. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 734 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. and click View Properties. 8 Right-click.

15 On the Design Bar. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and move it into the position shown below. and click Deactivate View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. select Custom for View Scale. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). and click OK. click View Properties. 14 In the Type Selector. Working in a Callout Analytique | 735 .Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the View menu. and click Activate View. click Modify. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. click Add View. select Section: Presentation Callout. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.

Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. activate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. In the steps that follow. and click OK. double-click Presentation Callout. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. select Solid Black for Type. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. 736 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Filled Region. and make adjustments as necessary. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. click Region Properties. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. When finished. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.

Working in a Callout Analytique | 737 . and sketch the rectangle shown below. click . under Sheets (all). 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.26 On the Project Browser. and click Activate View.Presentation. click Filled Region. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. double-click A105 . 29 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. 33 Select the crop region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 31 On the View menu. 738 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. click View Properties.30 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Crop Region Visible.

you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. under Extents. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click Save. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. click View Properties. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and click OK.34 On the View menu. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. and apply shadows to the views. clear Crop Region Visible. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 739 . 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. and click Deactivate View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 On the File menu. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 739.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click 1 : 200. 740 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Orient ➤ Southwest. double-click Isometric. 3 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click Duplicate. click . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Under Shadows Properties. 7 In the Name dialog. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Scale control. 2 On the View menu. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. specify 35 for Shadow. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.rvt. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Intensity. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.

18 On the View menu. double-click Isometric 2. 16 In the Rename View dialog. select Section Box. and click Rename. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Select Relative to View. select Override Silhouettes. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 741 . under 3D Views. right-click Isometric 1. in the list. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. right-click Isometric. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. and click OK.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. under Extents. under 3D Views. under Settings. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. and click Rename. enter Isometric 1. enter Isometric 2. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 13 In the Rename View dialog. under Silhouette Edges. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. 9 Click OK. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. 15 In the Project Browser. Cnst. Select 1st Flr. 11 Under Silhouette Edges.

and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol.20 Select the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. 742 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. make a duplicate of the view. under 3D Views. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 23 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2.

27 On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click Isometric 2. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. and click OK.Presentation. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. double-click A105 . Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 743 . Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. In such a case. 29 Select the section box. When you are finished. and click OK. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. Next.24 In the Rename View dialog. Notice the section box no longer displays. either adjust the plane location. 34 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click Isometric 3. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Isometric 3. and click OK. 31 To hide the section box. 25 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. 26 To hide the section box. in the Type Selector. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

select Viewport: Presentation. 36 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and.35 In the Project Browser. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 744 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. under 3D Views.

47 On the Design Bar. select Transparent for Background. and on the Options Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 745 . click Region Properties. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. select Concrete for Type. and click Activate View. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. The image below shows the lines redrawn. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Region Properties.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. click Edit. 38 Select the poche filled region. 42 Click OK twice. 43 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. and then click Edit/New. 44 Using the drawing tools. select Solid Black for Type. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar.

double-click 1st Flr. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 746. then you specify the eye direction and range.rvt. click Save. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Cnst. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.49 On the File menu. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Camera. you create the final view for the analytique. a cutaway perspective view. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. 746 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. you add it to the presentation sheet. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.

specify 35 for Shadow.The view opens immediately. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . Under Intensity. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Shadows Properties. select Cast Shadows. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 747 . 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it.

Add a section box 10 On the View menu. and click OK. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. under Silhouette Edges. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. select Section Box. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. 12 Select the section box. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. click View Properties. select Override Silhouettes. under Extents. Notice the controls that display on each plane. A section box now cuts through the building model. and click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 748 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

and click OK. Clear Crop Region Visible.Presentation. 18 To hide the crop region. under Sheets (all). 19 To hide the section box. After placing it. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. On the Annotation Categories tab. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 17 Under Model Crop Size. click Size. select Scale (locked proportions). under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 749 . double-click A105 . 15 On the Options Bar. enter 165 mm for Width. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser.14 Select the crop boundary. click View menu ➤ View Properties. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. you must specify the actual size of the image. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. under Change. and click OK. Because scale does not apply to perspective views.

enter Title. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 750. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. select a font. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm. under Text. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click . 750 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .22 On the File menu. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select the same font as the title. and click OK. click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. select Text : Title. click Duplicate. enter Description. specify a text size of 6 mm. click Duplicate. 2 On the Options Bar. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. under Text. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save.rvt.

click Save. 15 In the Type Selector. 18 On the File menu.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. Annotating the Analytique | 751 . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

752 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

Creating Families 4 753 .

754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families .

you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. In this tutorial. thus the term family. shape. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. 755 .” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based. they are still related and come from a single source. material set. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. each with a different size.

and when and how to use it. 756 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor .rfa extension. foundation. such as a dome roof. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. however. transfer them from one project to another. For example. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. Host-based families have components that require hosts. generic. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . has wall types that define interior. There are. The basic walls system family.rfa extension. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. Standalone families include columns. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. for example. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a particular component type. You also learn about the Family Editor. exceptions to this rule. floors. Revit MEP has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Walls. trees. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. and furniture. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . Using the Family Editor. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. while many more are stored in component libraries. exterior. This makes file management much easier. You can load them into projects. In this lesson. because there is only one file to track. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. In addition. and roofs are examples of these types of families. but you cannot create new system families. floors. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. and roofs. and partition wall styles.

After the family has been loaded in the project. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. 2 On the File menu. However. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. for example. if you change the original family. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. you learn about the Family Editor. and when to use it. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. elevation. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. or 3D. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. you can drag it into the document window. Introduction to the Family Editor | 757 .The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. Load Family command on the File menu. In the final exercise. how to access it. such as plan. and also a standalone furniture family component. you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. You create in-place families only within the current project. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. In this section. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. custom wall treatments. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. To add a family to your project. it is saved with the project.

and click Open. such as newsgroups. Within the Windows® environment. if you have exhausted your external resources. you can click File ➤ Open. With Revit MEP open. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. consider checking the web library and other web resources. you learn when to use the Family Editor. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 3 Next. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. 758 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. If you find a close match. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. open it in the Family Editor. you can double-click any file with an . 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. presume it is a bay window that you require. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. how to access it. and click Open.In this exercise. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. When the family opens. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. In this case. navigate to a family file. it opens within the Family Editor. modify it as needed. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch.rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP in the Family Editor. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 5 Finally. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. To start a new family. select the appropriate template. it should be available within the Type Selector. and then load it into the project. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template.

This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. a lighting fixture. you create an in-place family. When you create an in-place family. Using the installed templates. In each lesson. not within the Family Editor. 759 . you learn how to create specific Revit MEP 2008 families. and several annotation families. you create it within the project file. In addition. you learn how to create a different type of component. You create a furniture family. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family.

After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. height. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. 760 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Creating a Door Family In this lesson. The door type has a variable height and width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. and thickness. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise.

click . 9 In the Type Selector. Floor Plan: Ref. click Symbolic Lines. 7 Enter ZF. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. 4 On the View menu. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. select Doors [projection]. Labelled dimensions. click Tile. click Training Files. click New ➤ Family. part of the door properties. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. and represent the door opening profile. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 2 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 5 On the Window menu.rft. Notice the four tiled views. 6 Maximize the window. Level. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. are also displayed. 10 On the Options Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 761 . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door.

14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 762 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. select Width for Label. select Thickness for Label. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. click Modify. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 763 . Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar.

26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. In the image below. 22 In the Type selector. as shown. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. When drawing an arc from center and end points. 23 On the Options Bar. click . 21 On the Design Bar.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. select Plan Swing [cut]. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click the down arrow button. then you specify each end point. you first specify the arc center. and select the command from the menu. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. 24 Enter SI. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. click Symbolic Lines. 764 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. along with the witness line controls.

and click . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. under Elevations. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 765 . 1 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765. enter 50 mm for Depth. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior.

766 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .8 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Design Bar. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click Left. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference.

click Modify. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 767 . 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. and Fine are selected. 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK.12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify and select the dimension. under View Specific Display. select Thickness for Label. select Front/Back. Left/Right. under Floor Plans. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. 19 Under Detail Levels. and clear Plan/RCP. double-click Ref. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. verify that Coarse. Level. and When cut in Plan/RCP. Medium. click Visibility.

for Material. 768 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the New Material dialog box. click . The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. click . click for Texture. The solid geometry of the door is now complete.Red/Stained. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Materials and Finishes. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. you assign a material to the door leaf. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Materials. and click OK. click Duplicate. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click OK.No Gloss. for Material. under Name. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. select Oak Door. and click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. click Modify. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. enter Oak Door for Name. and click OK.Dark. select Panel for Subcategory. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768. It also defines its appearance when rendered. click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Materials dialog box. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. select Oak Door for Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. 6 Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak.20 On the Options Bar. under AccuRender. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click .

click the Model Graphics Style control.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. 21 On the View Control Bar. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. and select Shading with Edges. under Views (all). View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 769 . under 3D Views. double-click View 1.

770 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. “Defining New Door Types” on page 770 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1000 mm for Width. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. click Family Types. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Under Other. Under Other. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 24 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 3 In the Name dialog box. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Height. By flexing the new component. enter 2500 mm for Height. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. click Family Types. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. under Family Types. Click Apply. click New. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. 27 Click OK.

Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. Enter 925 mm for Width. click Save. click Door. Click Apply. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click New. 11 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. click New. click Training Files. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. and click OK.rfa. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 8 Under Family Types. 20 In the Open dialog box. under Template file. enter 2000 mm for Height. select it. Training Door. Define the third new door type. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. 19 On the Options Bar. click Wall. 9 In the Name dialog box. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. click Browse. 5 Under Family Types. enter 2100 mm for Height. enter 2134 mm for Height. Click Apply.rfa. Enter 1220 mm for Width. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Define the second new door type.rte. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. 12 On the File menu. select Project. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. and click Open. click New ➤ Project. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 750 mm for Width.4 In the Family Types dialog box. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 17 Under Create new. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 6 In the Name dialog box. click Load. and click OK. and click OK. Click Apply. 15 In the New Project dialog box. Training Door. Defining New Door Types | 771 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. click the Model Graphics Style control. click . select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. and select Shading with Edges. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 24 On the View Control Bar.23 On the View toolbar. 26 In the Type Selector. 772 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 On the Design Bar. click Door. 28 In the Type Selector.

and create the window sash as a sweep. Creating a Window Family | 773 . glazing and mullions as extrusions. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. and mullion offset. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family.30 In the Type Selector. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and specify values for the window width. height. Creating a Door Family. 32 You can close all files without saving. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. This completes the lesson. default sill height. Finally. You create the window frame. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights.

this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. also one of the window properties. click Tile.rft. 5 On the View menu. 8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. you specify the parameters for the new window family. equally spaced vertical mullions. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 774 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click New ➤ Family. Labelled dimensions. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. 4 On the Window menu. part of the window properties. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. The label name. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. is one of the type parameters. Height and Default Sill Height. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. click Training Files. 7 Enter ZF. are also displayed. When you add labels to dimensions.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. Four views are tiled on your display. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. The window type has a variable height and width.

10 In the Family Types dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 1300 mm for Height. and click Apply. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Change the height and width values again. and click Apply. Click Apply. Enter 1800 mm for Width. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 775 . Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. 12 Click OK. This process is called “flexing the model. This is the starting point for the new window.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. then sketching the sweep profile.

and click Open View. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 6 On the Design Bar. click the Scale control. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. and select 1:10. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click Sketch 2D Path. Snap the cursor to each corner. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Sketch Profile. click Finish Path. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. click . 776 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. select Elevation: Right.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.

15 On the Options Bar. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. click Dimension. click Ref Plane. 14 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 777 . click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. click . and select the dimension. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 17 On the Design Bar. select Prefer: Wall faces. and specify an offset of 50 mm.The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane.

24 Below the red dot. enter Sash for the Name. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall.18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. the exact dimensions are not critical. 778 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the reference plane. under Identity Data. click Lines. 25 On the Design Bar. click . Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. 19 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. However. select Chain and click . and click OK. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar.

When the lock displays. 28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. When the lock displays. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 779 .26 Select the right edge of the frame section. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. click it to lock the line to the reference plane.

click Dimension. TIP After adding the dimension. select the line you want to move. Modify each dimension if necessary. and specify the dimension value. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. 780 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. as shown.29 On the Design Bar.

TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. expand 3D Views. When the lock displays. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. click the lock to constrain the present value. click Finish Profile. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click Finish Sweep. 33 On the Tools toolbar. 37 In the Project Browser.Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. If necessary. 35 On the Design Bar. zoom out until it displays. under Views (all). The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. When the lock displays. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. 36 On the Design Bar. click . and double-click View 1. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 781 . this is the top of the window opening. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. Next.

and select the option. 4 On the Design Bar. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. Chain of walls or lines. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. click . double-click Exterior. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box.38 In the Project Browser. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and enter . click Set Work Plane. 782 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select Lock. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 782. 5 On the Options Bar. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.45 mm for Depth. and click OK.

■ Click . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.The entire sash outline is selected. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. ■ ■ Enter . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. set the following options: Click . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 783 . click Finish Sketch.50 mm for Offset. and lock icons display on each line. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.

Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise.10 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. double-click View 1. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. The window sash extrusion is now complete. under 3D Views. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 784 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. 11 In the Project Browser.

click Ref Plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 785 . 3 On the Options Bar. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. click . as shown. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and enter 30 mm for Offset. 2 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.

10 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Elevations.5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. 8 Select the reference plane. and click to create the glass boundary. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. under Identity Data. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 16 On the Options Bar. and select Lock. 786 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Dimension. double-click Exterior. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter -12 mm for Depth. click Lines. click . click Modify. click . 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box.

23 On the Design Bar. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Options Bar. click . under Identity Data. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 787 . under Elevations. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. After the family is loaded into a project. and click OK. sash. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. 20 Select the glass extrusion. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. double-click Right. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. click Modify. View the window model with frame.18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

click Family Types. Click Apply. Under Other. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. double-click View 1. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected.24 In the Project Browser. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 1500 mm for Height. For example. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. 788 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. NOTE After flexing the model. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. under 3D Views. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar.

click Ref Plane. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 789 . double-click Exterior. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. Click OK. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown.27 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Other. enter 1000 mm for Height. the exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Click Apply.

Do not be concerned with dimension values. click Dimension.4 On the Design Bar. 790 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. as shown. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. After adding the dimension. as shown. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it.

9 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. select Dimensions.. select <Add parameter. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. click Family Types.. and click OK. click Modify.Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. enter Mullion Offset for Name. Under Parameter Data. Under Group parameter under. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 791 . 11 On the Design Bar.> for Label. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. Click OK. under Dimensions. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Instance.

20 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 792 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 17 On the Options Bar. select Mullion Offset for Label. move the dimension value as shown. 14 Click the dimension value. click Modify. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. As you did before.Notice the dimension value becomes editable. click Set Work Plane.

22 On the Design Bar. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 793 . 23 On the Options Bar. After you complete the sketch. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Lines. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. and click OK. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. Move the dimension values as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 14 mm for Depth. 26 On the Design Bar. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. However.21 In the Work Plane dialog box. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Dimension. and click .

Select Type. 30 On the Options Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 794 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Family parameter. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Under Parameter Data. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. select Dimensions. enter Mullion Width for Name. select <Add parameter> for Label.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Under Group parameter under. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK.

Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. click Finish Sketch. Remember. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. Select the dimension. This is changed in later steps. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 795 . NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. and on the Options Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Under Other. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. and click Apply. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. 796 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes.

Enter 2000 mm for Width. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. evenly spaced. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 1000 mm for Height.NOTE After flexing the model. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 797 . click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Under Other. and aligned with the sash edge. In this case. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 41 On the Design Bar. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. click Set Work Plane. Click Apply. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click . 37 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Click OK. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. or undoing the same. 39 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash.

47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Move the dimension value as shown. 798 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 48 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. click Dimension. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. Remember. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion.44 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Modify. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. 49 On the Options Bar. 46 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. select Mullion Width for Label.

Select the dimension. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. click Join Geometry. ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 799 . click Finish Sketch. and select the vertical mullions. and on the Options Bar. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. select Mullion Width for Label. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges.NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. under 3D Views. enter 1500 mm for Height.54 In the Project Browser. 57 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. double-click View 1. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. If necessary. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 800 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 56 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the window. click Family Types. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area.

Enter 2000 mm for Width. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. sash. Click Apply. you assign materials to the frame. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 801 . and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. Click OK.58 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1000 mm for Height. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801.

TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and click OK. 8 On the View Control Bar. 9 Select the window frame sweep. double-click Exterior. click OK. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 802 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the sash. click OK. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). Dark. under Graphics. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. and Fine are selected. 6 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. select Stained. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 13 In the Materials dialog box. 2 In the Materials dialog box. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. enter Pine Frame for Name. Medium. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. Yellow/. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. and select Shading with Edges. click Modify. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Model Graphics Style control. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. verify that Coarse. 3 In the New Material dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 16 Under Detail Levels. sash. under Identity Data. under AccuRender. 18 On the Design Bar. click Materials. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. under Elevations. click for Material. select Edit for Visibility. and the mullions. click . No Gloss. under View Specific Display. select Pine Frame for Name. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click for Texture. 10 On the Options Bar. clear the other view options. and click OK. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. click Duplicate.

Medium. double-click Right. under View Specific Display. click Visibility. and click OK. 25 Zoom in on a window corner. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 803 . double-click View 1. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 24 In the Project Browser. 23 Under Detail Levels. verify that Coarse.Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and Fine are selected. 21 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 20 Select the glass extrusion.

Defining New Window Types In this exercise. 804 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . mullions. sash. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.The window frame. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. “Defining New Window Types” on page 804. and glass display their assigned materials. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created.

enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. under Family Types. 2 On the Design Bar. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. and click Apply. Click Apply. 7 In the Name dialog box. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. In the Family Types dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. and click Apply. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. Defining New Window Types | 805 . 3 In the Family Types dialog box. The window height is doubled. and click OK.Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. click New. and click Apply. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1250 mm for Height. enter 2000 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height.

16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name.rfa. 10 In the Name dialog box. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. click Load. and click OK. 20 In the Open dialog box. 806 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 1300 mm for Height. Click OK. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 19 On the Options Bar.rfa file.9 Under Family Types. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. Click Apply. click New. Click Apply. 15 On the File menu. click Save. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 13 In the Name dialog box. 11 In the Family Types dialog box. select it. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. and click Open. click Window. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. Enter 1500 mm for Height. navigate to the location of your Training Window. Training Window. click to start a new project based on your default template. click New.

34 On the View toolbar. and select Shading with Edges. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click Thin Lines. 35 On the View Control Bar. Defining New Window Types | 807 . 28 Add this window to the center of the wall.Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 25 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. click Wall. 32 On the View menu. 23 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. click . 24 On the Options Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. Notice the detail that displays. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 29 In the Type Selector. 27 In the Type Selector. click Window. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall.

and specify values for the furniture length and depth.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Finally. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. You begin by creating the desktop. 808 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. rolltop. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. and drawers as extrusions. drawer base.

their exact location is not critical. they represent the furniture centerline axes. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. 4 Maximize the view. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click New ➤ Family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. Level. 2 On the File menu. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 5 On the View menu. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown.rft. click Ref Plane. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 809 . Floor Plan: Ref. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. 810 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . proceeding to the centerline reference plane. and ending at the right reference plane. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. as shown. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane.

14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.12 On the Design Bar. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. click Dimension. 15 On the Design Bar. and ending at the lower reference plane. click Modify. 13 Select the left reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 811 . add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown.

add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. horizontal reference plane.17 To the right of the dimension you just created. 19 Select the upper. as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. click Modify. 812 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

> for Label. For Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. TIP To do this. select Family parameter. Afterwards.. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 813 . select Dimensions. Click OK. select <Add parameter.21 On the Design Bar. enter Length for Name.

814 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Depth for Name. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. 27 On the Options Bar. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to.26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. Select Type. select Family parameter. select <Add parameter. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. so when you open the Family Types dialog box.> for Label. click Family Types. Therefore.. you can still see the model. Under Parameter Data.. For Group parameter under. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Dimensions. 30 On the Design Bar.

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click . it will also adapt to the same changes. Click Apply.31 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. click Symbolic Lines. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. enter 3000 mm for Length. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. 2 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 815 . enter 2000 mm for Length. Your lines may have a lighter weight. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. NOTE In the image below. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar.

816 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 In the Project Browser. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. click Modify. click . and click OK. click Lines. and enter 100 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. select Level: Ref. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. Level for Name. click Finish Sketch. under Specify a new Work Plane.4 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. under Elevations. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Set Work Plane. 5 On the Design Bar. and select the top edge. 7 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. select <Add parameter. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.. Under Parameter Data. click Dimension. as shown.> for Label. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension.. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Parameter type. enter Height for Name. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and select the bottom edge.14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 817 . 22 On the Options Bar. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.

. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area.> for Label. you can still see the model. 818 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base.■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. select Dimensions. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click Apply. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. select <Add parameter. Enter 1200 mm for Height. enter 2000 mm for Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. click Modify. 25 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. and click Apply. 27 On the Design Bar. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click OK. Select Type. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. enter Thickness for Name. Click OK. select Dimensions. 29 On the Design Bar. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 750 mm for Height.. For Group parameter under. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818. Select Type. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.

and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Level. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 819 .Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . and enter 100 mm for Offset. click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar.

11 In the Work Plane dialog box.7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. click Set Work Plane. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Lock the dimension as shown. Level for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 13 On the Options Bar. select Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. 820 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . under Specify a new Work Plane. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Click the lock icon as shown. click Lines. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. as shown.

17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. two lock icons display.After you complete the rectangle. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 16 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 821 .

20 On the Tools toolbar. You can also highlight the entire line chain. using the TAB key.Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. 23 For the align-to reference. click the Mirror tool. 19 Select the four sketched lines. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 822 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . click . TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. click Modify. 22 On the Tools toolbar. as shown below at the cursor.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 823 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. A lock icon displays.

For Group parameter under. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data..> for Label. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. Click OK. select <Add parameter. 824 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 28 Add two final dimensions.■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. as shown. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. Select Type. 30 On the Options Bar..

33 On the Options Bar.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 825 . click Finish Sketch. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 35 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. double-click Front.

40 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click it to lock the alignment. click Visibility/Graphics. a lock icon displays. click . 42 On the View menu. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. and click OK. click Modify. 41 On the View toolbar. After the alignment. notice that annotations display in this view. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. However. 45 On the View Control Bar. 826 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view.37 On the Tools toolbar. click . click the Scale control and select 1:20.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 827 . Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 750 mm for Height. Click Apply. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. you can still see the model. 49 In the Family Types dialog box.Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 47 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827. click Family Types. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop.

under Elevations. 828 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click Right. and click to specify the upper left corner. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 5 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. click . and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

then the lower horizontal sketch line.8 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. then select the right parallel sketch line. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. click . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 829 . 9 Select the desk top.

. and lock it. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button.11 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. and lock it. 830 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click Lines. click Dimension. the upper sketch line. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. click the Fillet arc tool. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. 13 On the Design Bar.

19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 831 . under Elevations. 18 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Front. click . select the left edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. select the right edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete.

click . Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. If not. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. 832 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. and click Apply. you can still see the model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You can also use dimension constraints.21 On the View toolbar. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Height. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. The desk should adapt to all the changes.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 833 . select Pick a Plane. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Click OK. and click OK. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Click Apply. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar.25 In the Family Types dialog box. under Specify a new Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. click Set Work Plane. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height.

14 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. click . There should be four dimensions as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 11 On the Tools toolbar. zoom the view until you do. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 834 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click drawer set on the left. . select Multiple Alignment. under Elevations. click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it.5 In the Project Browser. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. click . 6 On the Design Bar. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. double-click Front. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. 7 On the Options Bar. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions.

enter 20mm for Extrusion End. and select Shading with Edges. 29 In the Materials dialog box. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. Polished. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. click 24 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click Modify. click Duplicate. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 In the New Material dialog box.Wood.15 On the Tools toolbar. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 28 Click OK. click . and click OK. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. for Material. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 835 . Cherry. 27 In the Material Library dialog box. 26 In the Materials dialog box. under Constraints. click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 On the View toolbar. enter Desk . Dark. under AccuRender. click . 31 On the View Control Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click for Texture.

you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 33 On the Design Bar. Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 2000 mm for Length. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click OK. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. The desk should adapt to all the changes. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. and click Apply. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. If not. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. You can also use dimension constraints. 836 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you can still see the model. Enter 1000 mm for Depth.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply.

18 In the Open dialog box. 19 In the Type Selector. click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. click Save. click 14 On the View toolbar. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. to start a new project based on your default template. click Component.rfa file. 11 On the File menu.rfa. click . select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. 3 In the Name dialog box. click New. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. and click OK. click Family Types. select it. 6 In the Name dialog box. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. Training Furniture. and click OK. and click OK. and click Open.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. click Load. 9 In the Name dialog box. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. Defining New Furniture Types | 837 . and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. click Apply. 17 On the Options Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 8 Under Family Types. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. click New. 15 On the View Control Bar. under Family Types. 5 Under Family Types.

23 In the Type Selector. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. and add the second desk. 838 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk.21 In the Type Selector. and click to add the third desk.

Level for Name. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. click New ➤ Family. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. their exact location is not critical. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. select Ref. However. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Drawing a Baluster | 839 .Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Level. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar.rft. and double-click Ref. 5 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Select Metric Baluster. and click Open. click Set Work Plane.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. 840 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. click OK. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. The new custom baluster is now complete. By default.rte file. 4 On the Design Bar. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 6 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the lock icon. click Browse. 12 On the Options Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Finish Sketch. click the Modelling tab. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 11 On the Design Bar.rfa. click New ➤ Project. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click Front. click . In the New Project Dialog box. and click Open. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. select Training Files. click Modify and select the extrusion. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion.

click . select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. under Baluster Family. click Modify and select the existing railing. click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 On the View toolbar. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 841 . 10 On the View menu. click . 13 On the Options Bar. click Shading with Edges. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement.rfa file. and click Open. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 11 On the View menu. 8 In the Open dialog box. click Edit/New. select it. click Orient ➤ Southwest. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.7 On the File menu. 19 Click OK.

select Training Files. balusters. you create five different profiles: a sweep.Sweep. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. Select Metric Profile. click Lines. click New ➤ Family.rft. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and a host sweep. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . their exact location is not critical. In this lesson.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. cornices. soffits. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. The new sweep profile is now complete. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. you draw a sweep profile.rfa. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. However. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Open. a railing. and other sweep-defined objects. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. 842 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . a stair nosing. a reveal. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. you create a rail profile. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. In the left pane of the New dialog box.

under Floor Plans. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser.rfa.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar.Rail. Select Metric Profile-Rail. The new rail profile is now complete. select Training Files. click New ➤ Family. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 843 . with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. their exact location is not critical. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. Level is open. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rft. verify that Ref. and click Open. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. In the left pane of the New dialog box. you create a stair nosing profile. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. However. click New ➤ Family. click Lines. Dataset ■ On the File menu.

Stair Nosing. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.rft. Level is open. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. Select Metric Profile-Reveal. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. 844 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a reveal profile. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. However. verify that Ref. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. and click Open. under Floor Plans. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane.rft. In addition. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. select Training Files. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Open. select Training Files. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. click New ➤ Family. click Lines. their exact location is not critical. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rfa.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . In the left pane of the New dialog box. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Lines. click New ➤ Family. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. their exact location is not critical. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar.Reveal. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. However. and click Open.rfa. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). you create a host sweep profile. Select Metric Profile-Hosted. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser.rft. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. select Training Files. The new reveal profile is now complete. which may be any vertical surface. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 845 . under Floor Plans. Level is open. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. verify that Ref.

846 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Create. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Create a new project 1 On the File menu. In the New Project Dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. select Training Files. Select the DefaultMetric. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines.rfa. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. click New ➤ Project. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. Specify the family category 3 On the Modelling menu. click Lines. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. their exact location is not critical. click OK. and click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog box.Host Sweep.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. click Browse. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. The new host sweep profile is now complete. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). However.rte file. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.

select Generic Models for Family Category. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.Sweep. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 10 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. click Load Profiles. 17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. enter Sweep for Name. 15 On the View toolbar. and double-click South. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 847 . 11 In the Open dialog box. beside Load Profiles. navigate to the location of Profile . 8 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path.rfa. Sketch the 2D sweep path 6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar.Sweep. and click OK. 12 In the Type Selector. select it. expand Elevations. select Profile . the exact location of the path is not critical. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. and click OK. Modify the sweep profile configuration 16 In the Project Browser. click . 5 In the Name dialog box.4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click Finish Path. and click Open. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.

Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click New ➤ Project. on the Options Bar. Draw a wall group 3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. click Ref Plane. 25 On the View toolbar. 20 Select the sweep profile and. 848 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise.rte file. click . The sweep profile application is now complete. select Profile Is Flipped. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. 21 Select the sweep profile again and. select Training Files. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. click Finish Family. 2 In the New Project dialog box. In the New Project Dialog box. on the Options Bar. Under Other. click Browse. click Wall. click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. and click Open.18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Constraints. 23 Click OK. Select the DefaultMetric. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. their exact location is not critical. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 4 Draw four walls as shown. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Horizontal is selected. click . click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 5 On the View toolbar.NOTE When you draw the walls. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 849 .

click Modify. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. 12 In the Open dialog box. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Profile . Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 11 On the File menu. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box.Host Sweep for Profile. you specify the room tag parameters. 17 On the View toolbar. navigate to the location of Profile . The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. Select M_Room Tag. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the New dialog box.10 On the Design Bar. and area with labels added to extract project data. click . click OK. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. click Edit/New.rft. 13 Select the wall sweep and. select Training Files.Host Sweep : Profile . and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. 850 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.Host Sweep. 18 In the Dynamic View dialog box. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click Spin [Shift]. . The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. floor and ceiling finish. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. under Construction. you create a room tag which displays room name. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and click Open.rfa. on the Options Bar. select it. and click Open.

select Floor Finish. click OK. and click OK. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. enter 2mm for Name. click Label. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 851 . enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 8 In the Name dialog box. select Label : 2mm. and click OK. select Ceiling Finish. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Area. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 Zoom in on the label. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. and click OK. click Duplicate. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. 7 In the Type properties dialog box. 17 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Edit/New.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click . select Underline. click Label. and click OK. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. select Name. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. clear Underline. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New.

Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select Training Files.rfa.rft. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. click Lines. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click . The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. 3 On the Options Bar. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select Generic Annotation. notice that there is only one view available. The new room tag is now ready for use. 852 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Open. In the left pane of the New dialog box. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.

7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 853 . 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. click .

in the North Line row. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. 854 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 In the Type Selector. click New. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE.10 On the Design Bar. select 3 for Line Weight. 17 On the Design Bar. select North Line.rfa. under Modify Subcategories. click Modify. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. click Modify. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. and click OK. enter North Line for Name. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. click Modify. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. Training North Arrow. click Object Styles. and select the upper vertical line.

12 On the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and your project data. click Sheet. text. select it. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. 5 Click OK. 7 On the File menu. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. select A1 metric. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click OK. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. The titleblock has linework. click New ➤ Project. click Symbol. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. In the New Project Dialog box. graphics. click Modify. select Training North Arrow. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 10 In the Type Selector. select Training Files. Select the DefaultMetric. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and labels. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ On the File menu. Creating a Titleblock Family | 855 . Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson.rfa. click Browse.Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 8 In the Open dialog box. and click Open. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rte file. and click Open. click New ➤ Titleblock.

6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and click Open. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click Lines.rft. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. click . and enter -25 for Offset. 856 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Select A0 metric. 3 On the Options Bar. click . 7 On the Options Bar. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. and click to draw a new vertical line. and enter 140 for Offset.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. and click .

and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click Modify. select Wide Lines. click Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. select Title Blocks. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and enter 20 for Offset. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 13 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click . 21 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. press CTRL. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 857 .11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line.

and labels to your titleblock.25 On the Design Bar. you add a company logo. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 4 Zoom in on the logo. click Modify. text notes. 858 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 2 In the Open dialog box. navigate to Training Files/Common. The titleblock linework is now complete. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown.jpg. select Company Logo. click Import/Link ➤ Image. and click Open.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. click . Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. enter 10mm Bold for Name. select Text : 8mm. and select Bold. 6 On the Options Bar. in the text box. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 859 .Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. under Text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. click Text. click Edit/New. enter 10 for Text Size. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 Click OK twice. and click OK. and add an address and phone number as shown.

21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. 860 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the consultant text note. 18 Select the drag handle. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. address. click Modify. and select the last text note. click Modify. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Text. Add consultant name. and drag the text note down as shown.Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 861 . select Constrain and Multiple. click . 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group.23 On the Edit toolbar.

39 Draw a text box in the next space up. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. click . click Text. under Text. enter 5 for Text Size. 32 In the Name dialog box. 862 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Sheet Number:. and click OK. click Duplicate. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Date:. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 5mm for Name. and enter Drawn By:. 34 Click OK twice. and enter Checked By:.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. select Text : 5mm. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Issue Date. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. click Label. 41 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 863 . select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment.

57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. and click to specify the label location. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. select Sheet Number. and click to specify the label location. click . 864 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. under Text. click Label. and click OK. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 59 On the Options Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Project Number.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. enter 15 for Text Size. and click OK. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. select Drawn By. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Label : 15mm Label. click Center and Middle. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Checked By and click OK. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. 50 On the Options Bar. enter 15mm Label for Name. 55 Click OK twice. 53 In the Name dialog box. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field.

67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Client Name. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Name. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 865 . and click to specify the label location. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. click Label. and click OK. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.62 Select the left drag handle on the label.

866 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 75 Click OK twice. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu.rte file. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Select the DefaultMetric.rfa.70 On the Options Bar. select it. click Edit/New. click Sheet. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. In the New Project Dialog box. 5 In the Open dialog box. click New ➤ Project. select 4mm Label. 7 Click OK. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. The titleblock graphics. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Duplicate. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Text. click . and labels are now complete. enter 4 for Text Size. and click Open. click Browse. click Modify. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click Open. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 73 In the Name dialog box. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. text. click OK. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 80 On the Design Bar. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the label location. select File Path. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Left and Middle. click Load.rfa file. select Training Files. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 77 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 4mm Label.

14 Click OK. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. click Project Information. Enter Office Building for Project Name. under Other. 12 On the Settings menu. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Name for Drawn By. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. click Modify and select the titleblock. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 867 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click . 9 On the Options Bar.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar.

In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. set the Area to Square meters. click Open. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click Project Units. To change the units of measurement to meters. Set the Length units to millimeters. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. and click Open. on the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. click Orient ➤ Southeast.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. 868 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise.rvt. select Training and navigate to the Common folder. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. and set the suffix to None. Select c_Pantheon.

and click Open View. and double-click South. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 869 . Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. and click OK. select Roofs for Family Category.Center. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown.Next. enter Dome for Name. click Create. expand Elevations. select Section: Wall Section . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. click Set Work Plane. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. 5 In the Name dialog box. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and click OK.

870 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point.The center wall section view is displayed. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. click Axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click . click . click Lines. 12 On the Options Bar.

click . and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown.17 Move the cursor out. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 871 . The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. and select Chain. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle.

Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 23 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 872 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click . click .

30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. click and select Chain. click . click Lines.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 873 . Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar.

874 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. 41 On the Design Bar. The dome roof in-place family is now complete.35 Select the interior face of the wall. click . 40 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 38 In the Materials dialog box. select Concrete . Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. 42 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click Create. click for Material. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. click Finish Family. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. click OK. click Revolution Properties. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise.

select Floors for Family Category. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. select Section: Wall Section . 9 In the Go To View dialog box. click Set Work Plane. click . and click OK. enter Concave Floor for Name. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. 11 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Name dialog box. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 875 . 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. select Pick a Plane.2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click South. and click OK. and click OK. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve.Center. click Axis.

O. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Footing level line and the axis. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. click Lines. and select Chain. 876 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. click . 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.

Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 877 . Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. double-click 3D Section View. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Family. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. 22 In the Materials dialog box. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. The concave floor closed profile is now complete.O. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. click OK. click Finish Sketch. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. click for Material. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson.18 Specify the intersection of the T. select Cobblestone for Name. click Revolution Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.O.

878 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

assigned subcatecories.Parametric Component Design Techniques 18 In this tutorial. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. The truss also has multiple types. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. In exercises that become increasingly complex. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. methodology. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. At the end of this tutorial. 879 . During this tutorial. not specifically how to make a floor truss. In this case. you will understand the process. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. and detail level controls. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit MEP 2008. formula-based parameters. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor.

a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. Take this into consideration during your design planning. For every complexity added to a family. this must be a structural beam component. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. For training purposes. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. Two types should be created. In the next exercise. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. In this case. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 880 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and structural walls. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. Although this solution is possible. In addition. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. NOTE When creating a new family. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. It should also be an available option within a beam system. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. In this lesson. and also works intuitively with them. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. In this case. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. beams. you should avoid over-designing the component. a generic floor-based component might work. it is not the best solution. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. you determine the requirements of the new component. This decision dictates which family template you begin with.

Depending on the family you are designing. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. In addition. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 881. the planning stage and questions may differ. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. 4 Continue with the next exercise. Selecting the Family Template | 881 . In the previous exercise. such as wood type.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. would require Instance or Type parameters. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. These materials can be applied using Object Styles.

for example: wall based or floor based. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. You should be in the Metric Templates folder.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. Like most generic family templates. notice the preview. and open Metric\Templates. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. you will access them from the Training Files folder. There are two structural framing templates provided. this is where you access family templates.rft 882 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. In addition. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. click Training Files. On the right side of the New dialog box.rft. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. Usually. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). 4 Scroll through the various template options. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. However. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Notice that most of the template names include the component type. 6 In the New dialog box. Select it so that the preview displays. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial.Beams and Braces. scroll to the structural framing templates.

rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.Beams and Braces. and notice the preview. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. 10 Maximize the view. Floor Plan: Ref. ■ Metric Structural Framing . This template is the best starting point for the new family. Level. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Floor Plan: Ref.rft to open it. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces. Level Selecting the Family Template | 883 .Complex and Trusses.rft and notice the preview. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . spacing.Complex and Trusses.rft. Because of its simplicity.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. and display functions required by stru